i in rtoH otato*          m !«, nf          Publication 9240.1 -22
           United States          Otttoe Ot
           Environmental Protection     Solid Waste and
           Agency            Emergency Response


           Superfund	_____



xvEPA     USEPA CONTRACT

            LABORATORY PROGRAM




            STATEMENT OF WORK

            FOR ANALYSIS OF



            POLYCHLORINATED DIBENZO-P-DIOXINS (PCDD)
            AND
            POLYCHLORINATED DIBENZOFURANS (PCDF)


            MULTI-MEDIA, MULTI-CONCENTRATION


            DFLM 01.1

-------
                                                  9240.1-22
                                                  PB95-963520
                                                  EPA540/R-94/089
     USEPA CONTRACT LABORATORY PROGRAM
             STATEMENT OF WORK

              FOR ANALYSIS OF

  POLYCHLORINATED  DIBENZO-P-DIOXINS (PCDD)

  AND POLYCHLORINATED DIBENZOFURANS (PCDF)


      Multi-Media, Multi-Concentration

          Document Number DFLM01.0

Including Revision DFLM01.1 (September 1991)

-------
                              STATEMENT OF WORK


                              TABLE OF CONTENTS



EXHIBIT A:  SUMMARY OF REQUIREMENTS

EXHIBIT B:  REPORTING AND DELIVERABLES REQUIREMENTS

EXHIBIT C:  TARGET COMPOUND LIST (TCL) AND CONTRACT REQUIRED QUANTITATION
            LIMITS (CRQL)

EXHIBIT D:  ANALYTICAL METHODS
                                                   »
EXHIBIT E:  QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

EXHIBIT F:  CHAIN-OF-CUSTODY, DOCUMENT CONTROL, AND STANDARD OPERATING .
            PROCEDURES

EXHIBIT G:  GLOSSARY
                                                                     DFLM01.0

-------
       EXHIBIT A
SUMMARY OF REQUIREMENTS
                                         DFLM01.0

-------
                               Table of Contents






                                                                           Page






SECTION I:     General Requirements 	A- 3




SECTION II:    Specific Requirements 	A-6




SECTION III:  Detailed Technical and Management Requirements 	A-9
                                    A-2                              DFLM01.0

-------
                                  SECTION  I
                             GENERAL REQUIREMENTS


A.    Purpose of the Statement of Work

      Under the legislative authority granted to the U.S. Environmental
      Protection Agency (EPA) under the Comprehensive Environmental Response,
      Compensation, and Liability Act of 1980 (CERCLA) and the Superfund
      Amendments and Reauthorization Act of 1986 (SARA), EPA develops
      standardized analytical methods for the measurement of various
      pollutants in environmental samples from known or suspected hazardous
      waste sites.  Polychlorinated dibenzo-p-dioxins and polychlorinated
      dibenzofurans (PCDDs/PCDFs) are among the pollutants that are of
      concern to EPA at such sites.  PCDDs/PCDFs are believed to be among the
      most toxic organic compounds ever released into the environment.

      With the advent of the Superfund program in 1980, EPA required the
      analyses of many more environmental samples than could possibly be
      handled through its own laboratories.  Therefore, EPA elected to
      procure analytical services through commercial laboratories and
      established the Contract Laboratory Program (CLP) as a means of
      obtaining standardized analyses on a long-term firm, fixed-price basis.
      This Statement of Work (SOW) provides a technical and contractual
      framework for laboratories to apply EPA analytical methods to the
      analysis of PCDDs/PCDFs in environmental samples.  The SOW provides not
      only the analytical methods to be applied, but also the specific
      technical and contractual requirements by which EPA will evaluate the
      data.

B.    General Requirements

      This SOW provides an analytical method for the isolation, detection and
      quantitative measurement of PCDDs and PCDFs in water, soil, fly ash,
      and chemical waste samples such as oil, sludge, and stillbottoms.
      There are 210 possible PCDD/PCDF isomers, and the methods were
      developed for the analysis of the 17 PCDDs/PCDFs that bear chlorine
      atoms in the 2,3,7 and 8 positions of their respective structures.
      These 17 compounds, termed the "2,3,7,8-substituted PCDDs/PCDFs," are
      those PCDDs/PCDFs that, based on structure activity relationships, are
      believed to pose the greatest risks to human health and the
      environment.  The SOW also requires determination of the total
      concentrations of all PCDDs or PCDFs in a given level of chlorination
      (i.e., Total TCDD, Total PecDD, etc.), although complete
      chromatographic separation of all 210 PCDDs/PCDFs is not possible under
      the instrumental conditions described in the method.

      The SOW requires the calculation of the 2378-TCDD toxicity equivalence
      using the procedures described in the "Update of Toxicity Equivalency
      Factors (TEFs) for Estimating Risks Associated with Exposures to
      Mixtures of Chlorinated Dibenzo-p-Dioxins and Dibenzofurans
      (CDDs/CDFs)," March 1989, (EPA'625/3-89/016).  To aid in the assessment


                                    A-3                        DFLM01.1 (9/91)

-------
of risks associated with exposure to these compounds, a factor is
assigned to each of the 17 2,3,7,8-substituted FCDDs and FCDFs that
relates the toxicity of that isomer to a concentration of the most
toxic isomer, 2378-TCDD.  The concentrations of any isomers that are
detected in an environmental sample can then be adjusted by the
toxicity equivalency factor (x£7) and summed, yielding a concentration
of 2378-TCDD with an equivalent toxicity.

Because isomer specificity for all 17 2378-substituted PCDDs/PCDFs may
not be achieved using a single gas chromatographic column, the SOW
requires analysis of sample extracts on a second column when the TEF-
adjusted concentration exceeds a specified level.  This level varies by
sample matrix.

The sample preparation procedures in the SOW use matrix-specific
extraction techniques and a single set of cleanup techniques.  The
sensitivity of this method is dependent upon"the level of interferents
within a given sample.  Interferents co-extracted from the sample may
vary considerably from source to source, depending on the origin of the
sample and the matrix type.  PCDDs and FCDFs are often associated with
other chlorinated compounds such as PCBs and polychlorinated diphenyl
ethers which may occur at concentrations several orders of magnitude
higher than that of the analytes of interest and may cause interference
problems.

The samples to be analyzed by the Contractor are from known or
suspected hazardous waste sites and may contain hazardous organic
and/or inorganic materials at high concentration levels.  The
Contractor should be aware of the hazards associated with the handling
and analysis of these samples.  The Contractor is responsible for
taking all necessary measures to ensure the health and safety of its
employees.

The Contractor must be aware of the importance of maintaining the
integrity of the data generated under the contract, as data may be used
to make decisions regarding public health and environmental welfare.
In addition, the data may be used in litigation against potentially
responsible parties in the enforcement of Superfund legislation.

Applications and Limitations of the Statement of Work

This SOW is designed as part of the documentation for a contract
between EPA and a commercial laboratory performing analyses in support
of EPA Superfund programs.  The resulting data may be used by EPA for a
variety of purposes, such as determining the nature and extent of
contamination at a hazardous waste site, assigning administrative
priority to such sites based on the risk of exposure, determining
appropriate cleanup actions, and determining when remedial actions are
complete.

The methods described in this SOW are designed for the analysis of
specific analytes in specific environmental matrices and over a limited
concentration range.  However, this SOW is not suitable for all
analytical situations and  should not be applied to matrices, analytes,


                              A-4                              DFLM01.0

-------
      or concentration ranges for which it was not intended.  Similarly, the
      contractual requirements embodied in the SOW apply only to those
      analyses performed by commercial laboratories through the CLP.
      Therefore, other organizations wishing to procure analytical services
      using the methods in this SOW are advised to develop a contracting
      mechanism that explicitly includes both the technical and contractual
      requirements contained in this SOW.

D.    Organization of the Statement of Work

      Exhibit A provides an overview of the SOW and its general requirements.
      Exhibit B contains a description of the reporting and deliverables
      requirements, in addition to the data reporting forms and the forms
      instructions.  Exhibit C specifies the target compound list for this
      SOW with the contract-required quantitation limits for sample matrices.
      Exhibit D details the specific analytical procedures to be used with
      this SOW and resulting contracts.  Exhibit E provides descriptions of
      required quality assurance/quality control (QA/QC) standard operating
      procedures and procedures used for the evaluation of analytical
      methodologies, QA/QC performance, and the reporting of data.   Exhibit F
      contains chain-of-custody and sample documentation requirements which
      the Contractor shall follow.  To ensure proper understanding of the
      terms utilized in this SOW, a glossary can be found in Exhibit G.
                                   A-5                               DFLM01.0

-------
                                  SECTION II
                            SPECIFIC
A.   Sample shipments to the Contractor's facility will be scheduled and
     coordinated by the EPA CLP Sample Management Office (SMO) acting on
     behalf of the Administrative Project Officer.  The Contractor shall
     communicate with SMO personnel by telephone, as necessary throughout the
     process of sample scheduling, shipment, analysis and data reporting, to
     ensure that samples are properly processed.

     If there are problems w__.. the samples (e.g., mixed media, containers
     broken or leaking) or sample documentation/paperwork (e.g., Traffic
     Reports not with shipment, sample and Traffic Report numbers do not
     correspond), the Contractor shall immediately contact SMO for
     resolution. The Contractor shall immediately notify SMO regarding any
     problems and laboratory conditions that affect the timeliness of
     analyses and data reporting.  In particular, the Contractor shall notify
     SMO in advance regarding sample data that will be delivered late and
     shall specify the estimated delivery date.

B.   Sample analyses will be scheduled by groups of samples, each defined as
     a Case and identified by a unique EPA Case number assigned by SMO. A
     Case signifies a group of samples collected at one site or geographical
     area over a finite time period and includes one or more field samples
     with associated blanks.  Samples may be shipped to the Contractor in a
     single shipment or multiple shipments over a period of time, depending
     on the size of the Case.

     A Case consists of one or more Sample Delivery Group(s).  A Sample
     Delivery Group (SDG) is defined by the following, whichever is most
     frequent:

          o   Each Case of field samples  received,  OR
          o   Each 20  field samples within a Case,  OR
          o   Each 14  calendar  day period during which field samples in a Case
              are received (said period beginning with the receipt of the
              first sample in the SDG).

     Samples may be assigned to  SDGs by matrix  (e.g., all soil  samples in one
     SDG, all water samples a  second SDG,  and all  fly ash samples  in a third
     SDG), at the  discretion of  the laboratory.   Such assignment must be made
     at the time  the  samples are received and may not be made  retroactively.

     All data for  all  samples  in a SDG are due  concurrently to  all data
     recipients  as stipulated  in the Delivery  Schedule  in Exhibit  B, Section
     I.  Data for  all  samples  in a SDG must be  submitted  together  (in one
     package) in the  order  specified in  Exhibit B.   The SDG number is the EPA
     sample number of the first  sample received in the  SDG.  When  several
     samples  are  received together in  the first SDG shipment,  the  SDG number
                                    A-6                              DFLM01.0

-------
     shall  be  the  lowest  sample number  (considering both  alpha and numeric
     designations)  in the first group of samples  received under the SDG.   The
     SDG  number  is  reported on all  data reporting forms.

     The  SDG receipt  date is the  day the last sample  in the SDG is received.
     Eata for  all  samples in the  SDG ar  due  as stipulated in thr  Delivery
     Schedule  in Exhibit  B.

     The  Contractor is responsible  for  identifying each SDG as samples are
     received, through proper sample documentation (see Exhibit B) and
     communication with SMO personnel.

C.   Each sample received by the  Contractor will  be  labeled with an EPA
     sample number and will be accompanied by a Traffic Report bearing the
     sample number and descriptive  information regarding  the sample.  The
     Contractor  shall complete and  sign the Traffic  Report, recording the
     date of sample receipt and  sample  condition  for each sample container.

     The  Contractor shall submit signed copies of Traffic Reports for all
     samples in  a  SDG to  SMO within three calendar days following receipt of   |
     the  last  sample  in the SDG.  Traffic Reports shall be submitted in SDG
     sets (i.e., all  Traffic Reports for a SDG shall be clipped together)
     with a SDG  Cover Sheet containing  information regarding the SDG,  as
     specified in  Exhibit B.

D.   The  Contractor shall use EPA Case  numbers (including SDG numbers) and
     EPA  sample  numbers to identify samples received under this contract both
     verbally  and  in  reports/correspondence.

E.   Samples will  be  shipped routinely  to the Contractor  through an overnight
     delivery  service.  However,  as necessary, the Contractor shall be
     responsible for  any handling or processing required  for the receipt of
     sample shipments, including pick-up of samples at the nearest servicing
     airport,  bus  station or other carrier service within the Contractor's
     geographical  area.  The Contractor shall be  available to receive sample
     shipments at  any time the delivery service  is operating, including
     Saturdays.

F.   The Contractor shall accept all samples scheduled by SMO, provided  that
     the total number of samples received in any calendar month does not
     exceed the monthly limitation expressed in the contract.  Should the
     Contractor elect to accept additional samples, the Contractor  shall
     remain bound by all contract requirements for analysis of those samples
     accepted.

G.   The Contractor shall prepare,  extract, cleanup extracts, and analyze
     samples according to  the analytical procedures outlined  in Exhibit  D.
     The Contractor shall  also adhere  to the QA/QC requirements specified in
     Exhibit D, including  the analyses  of calibration standards,  blanks,
     spiked samples,  duplicate analyses, etc., as specified  in the  exhibit.
                                    A-7                       DFLM01.1  (9/91)

-------
H.   EPA has provided the Contractor with forms for the reporting of data
     (Exhibit B).   The Contractor shall be responsible for completing and
     returning analysis data sheets in the format specified in the Contract
     Performance/Delivery Schedule.

     Use of formats other than tnose designate  ._, c.r*i wo.ll be deemed as
     noncompliance.  Such data are unacceptable.  Resubmission in the
     specified format will be required at no additional cost to the
     Government.

I.   The Contractor shall have sufficient gas chromatograph/mass
     spectrometer/data system (GC/MS/DS) capability to meet all the terms and
     conditions of the EPA contract.  The Contractor shall maintain, at a
     minimum, all analytical equipment allocated for this contract at the
     time of contract award. (See Section III for instrumentation
     requirements.)

J.   Certain samples may require sample reruns  (reextraction and/or
     reanalysis) due to either problems with the sample matrix or Contractor
     insufficiencies.  Sample reruns may be considered either as billable or
     nonbillable as defined in Exhibit D.  For  the purposes of this contract,
     the term "automatic rerun" shall signify only billable rerun analyses.

K.   EPA may -provide standards for use in analyses performed under the
     contract, subject to availability.  However, the SOW identifies specific
     solutions that must be purchased from commercial sources, and will not
     be provided by EPA.  When provided, EPA-supplied materials are intended
     for use only on EPA samples, and the Contractor may be asked to
     demonstrate during EPA on-site evaluations that separate standards are
     maintained for non-EPA work.  The Contractor will be instructed how and
     where to request EPA standards at time of  contract award.  The
     Contractor is responsible for ensuring that all required standards are
     available at the Contractor's facility before accepting any samples from
     EPA.

L.   The Contractor shall respond within seven  days to requests from data
     recipients for additional information or explanations that result from
     the Government's inspection activities.

M.   The Contractor shall preserve all sample extracts after analysis in
     bottles/vials with Teflon-lined septa and  shall maintain stored extracts
     in the  dark at room temperature.  The Contractor  is required to retain
     the sample extracts for 365 days after data  submission.  During that
     time, the Contractor shall submit the 'extracts within seven days after
     request, as specified  in the  Contract Performance/Delivery Schedule.

N.   The Contractor shall adhere to chain-of-custody procedures described  in
     Exhibit F.  Documentation, as  described  therein,  shall show that all
     procedures are being strictly followed.  This documentation shall be
     reported as  the  Complete SDG  File  (see Exhibit B).
                                    A-8                               DFLM01.0

-------
                                 SECTION III
                DETAILED TECHNICAL AND MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS


The Contractor shall have the following technical and management
capabilities.  For those technical functions that require a minimum
educational degree and experience, an advanced degree in chemistry or any
scientific/engineering discipline (e.g., Master's or Doctorate) does not
substitute for the minimum experience requirements.

The Contractor shall notify in writing the Technical Project Officer and the
Administrative Project Officer of any changes affecting key personnel listed
in this section within 14 days of the change.  The Contractor shall provide a
detailed resume to the Technical Project Officer, Administrative Project
Officer, and EMSL-LV for the replacement personnel within 14 days of the
Contractor's assignment of the personnel.  The resume shall include position
description of titles, education (pertinent to this contract), number of
years of experience (pertinent to this contract), month and year hired,
previous experience and publications.

A.   TECHNICAL CAPABILITY

     1.   Technical Functions

          a.    GC/MS Laboratory  Supervisor

               (1)  Responsible  for all  technical efforts of the GC/MS
                   laboratory to meet all terms and conditions of the EPA
                   contract.

               (2)  Qualifications:

                   (a)  Education:

                        Minimum of a Bachelor's degree in chemistry or any
                        scientific/engineering discipline.

                   (b)  Experience:

                        Minimum of three years of  laboratory experience with
                        dioxin  and furan analyses, including at least one
                        year of supervisory experience.

          b.    Sample  Preparation Laboratory Supervisor

               (1)  Responsible  for all  technical  efforts  of sample
                   preparations to meet all  terms and conditions  of the  EPA
                   contract.
                                   A-9a                       DFLM01.1 (9/91)

-------
(2)  Qualifications:

    (a)  Education:

         Minimum of a Bachelor's degree in chemistry or any
         scientific/engineering discipline.

    (b)  Experience:

         Minimum of three years of laboratory experience,
         including at least one year of supervisory
         experience.
                     A-9b                      DFLM01.1  (9/91)

-------
c.   Quality Assurance Officer

     (1)  Responsible for overseeing the QA aspects of data and
          reporting directly to upper management to meet all terms
          and conditions of the EPA contract.

     (2)  Qualifications:

          (a) Education:

              Minimum of  a Bachelor's degree  in chemistry or any
              scientific/engineering discipline.

          (b) Experience:

              Minimum of  three years of laboratory experience,
              including at least  one year  of  applied experience
              with QA principles  and practices  in an analytical
              laboratory.

d.   GC/MS Operator Qualifications

     One year of experience in operating and maintaining GC/MS/DS
     used, for selected ion monitoring (SIM) with a Bachelor's degree
     in chemistry or any scientific/engineering discipline, or in
     lieu of the Bachelor's degree, three years of experience in
     operating and maintaining the GC/MS and interpreting GC/MS SIM
     data.

e.   Extract Cleanup Expert Qualifications

     One year of experience in extract cleanup with a Bachelor's
     degree in chemistry or any scientific/engineering discipline,
     or in lieu of the Bachelor's degree, three years 'of experience
     in sample extraction and cleanup.

f.   Extraction/Concentration Expert Qualifications

     (1)  Education:

          Minimum of high school diploma and a college-level course
          in general chemistry.

     (2)  Experience:

          Minimum of one year of experience in
          extraction/concentration.

g.   Technical Staff Redundancy

     The bidder shall have a minimum of one chemist available at any
     one time as a back-up technical person with the following
     qualifications to ensure continuous operations to accomplish
     the required work as specified by the EPA contract.


                          A-10                              DFLM01.0

-------
          (1)  Education:

              Minimum of a Bachelor's degree in chemistry or any
              scientific/engineering discipline.

          (2)  Experience:  Min'*?um of one year in each of the following
                           areas -

                           o   GC/MS operation and maintenance using
                               selected ion monitoring.

                           o   Dioxin/furan analysis.

                           o   Sample extraction and cleanup.
2.   Facilities

     The adequacy of the facilities  and  equipment  is  of equal importance
     as the technical staff to accomplish  the required work  as  specified
     by the EPA  contract.

     a.   Sample  Receipt Area

          Adequate,  contamination-free, well-ventilated work space
          provided with  chemical resistant bench top  for receipt and  safe
          handling of EPA samples.

     b.   Storage Area

          Sufficient space  to  maintain unused EPA  sample volume for 60
          days after data submission and sample extracts for 365 days
          after data submission.  Samples must be  stored in  an atmosphere
          demonstrated to be free from all potential  contaminants.

     c.   Sample  Preparation Area

          Adequate,  contamination-free, well-ventilated work space
          provided with:

          (1)  Benches with chemical resistant tops,  exhaust hoods.

              NOTE:    Standards must  be prepared in a glove box or
                       isolated area.

          (2)  Source of distilled or demineralized organic-free water.

          (3)  Analytical balance(s) located away  from draft and rapid
              change in temperature.

3.   Instrumentation

     At a minimum, the Contractor shall have the following  instruments
     operative and committed for the full duration of the contract.
                              A-11                       DFLM01.1  (9/91)

-------
         a.   Primary Instrument Requirements

              (1)   GC/MS  equipped with GO  to  MS  interface capable of
                   extending a 60 meter by 0.32  mm ID,  bonded DB-5 (or
                   equivalent),  fused silica  capillary  column into the MS ion
                   source.

              (2)   GC/MS  computer interfaced  by  hardware to the MS and
                   capable  of monitoring at least  18  selected ions for the
                   duration of the  chromatographic analysis.

              (3)   GC/MS  computer equipped with  mass  storage device for
                   saving all data  from GC/MS analyses.

              (4)   GC/MS  computer software capable of searching GC/MS
                   analyses for specific ions and  plotting the intensity of
                   the ions with respect to time or scan run.

              (5)   Magnetic tape storage device  capable of recording data for
                   long-term, off-line storage.

         b.   Secondary Instrument  Requirements

              The Contractor shall  have one back-up instrument, identical to
              the requirements above, in place and operational at any time.
              This instrument must  be included in the bidder's inventory of
              equipment.   In addition, the Contractor shall have an in-house
              stock of instrument parts and circuit boards to ensure
              continuous operation to meet contract-specified holding and
              turnaround times.

     4.   Data Handline and  Packaging

         The Contractor  shall have reasonable capacity to  submit reports and
         data packages as specified  in Exhibit B.  To  complete  this task,  the
         Contractor shall be required to:

         a.   Provide space,  tables and copy machines  to meet the contract
              requirements.

         b.   Designate personnel.

B.   LABORATORY MANAGEMENT  CAPABILITY

     The Contractor must  have an organization with well-defined
     responsibilities  for each individual  in  the management system to ensure
     sufficient resources for EPA contract(s) and  to  maintain a successful
     operation.  To establish this  capability, the Contractor shall designate
     personnel to  carry out the following  responsibilities for the EPA
     contract.   Functions include,  but are not limited  to,  the following:

     1.   Technical Staff

         Responsible  for all technical efforts  for the EPA contract.


                                   A-12                              DFLM01.0

-------
     Project Manager
     Responsible for overall aspects of EPA contract(s) (from sample
     receipt through data delivery) and the primary contact for the
     Administrative Project Officer and Technical Project Officer.
     SainDle Custodian
     Responsible for receiving EPA samples (logging, handling and
     storage) .

A .    Quality Assurance Officer

     Responsible for o\_^ seeing the QA aspects of the data and reporting
     directly to upper management.
                                              »
5 .    Document Control Officer

     Responsible for ensuring that all documents generated are placed in
     the Complete SDG File for inventory and are delivered to the
     appropriate EPA Region or other receiver as designated by EPA.
                               A-13                              DFLM01.0

-------
               EXHIBIT B
REPORTING AND DELIVERABLES REQUIREMENTS
                                                  DFLM01.0

-------
                              Table of Contents






                                                                         Page






SECTION I:    Contract Reports/Deliverables Distribution 	  B-3




SECTION II:   Report Descriptions and Order of Data Deliverables 	  B-6




SECTION III:  Form Instruction Guide 	B-15




SECTION IV:   Data Reporting Forms 	B-32
                                    B-2                              DFLM01.0

-------
                                   SECTION I
                  CONTRACT REPORTS/DELIVERABLES DISTRIBUTION
The following table reiterates the contract reporting and deliverables
requirements specified in the Contract Schedule and specifies the
distribution that is required for each deliverable.  NOTE: Specific recipient
names and addresses are subject to change during the term of the contract.
The Administrative Project Officer (APO) will notify the Contractor in
writing of such changes when they occur.
              Item
  No.
Copies
    Delivery
    Schedule
                                                         Distribution
            f4)
     A.  Updated SOFs
         60 days after
         contract award.
    *B. Sample Traffic         1
        Reports (original)
     C. Sample Data Summary
        Package
  ***D. Sample Data Package
 ****E. Complete SDG File
*****F. Quality
        Assurance
        Plan
     G. GC/HS Tapes
Lot
3 days after         >
receipt of last
sample in Sample
Delivery Group
(SDG).**

45 days after        S
receipt of last
sample in SDG.

45 days after        Ji
receipt of last
sample in SDG.

45 days after        >
receipt of last
sample in SDG.

60 days after
contract award and
as required in
Exhibit E.

Retain for 365 days
after data submis-
sion, or submit with-
in 7 days after
receipt of written
request by APO and/or
EMSL-LV.
                                As Directed
As Directed
                                   B-3
                                 DFLM01.1 (9/91)

-------
                               No.          Delivery        Distribution
    	Item	Copies	Schedule	m  (2)  (3)

     H. Extracts             Lot     Retain for 365 days     As Directed
                                     after data submis-
                                     sion, or submit with-
                                     in 7 days after
                                     receipt of written
                                     request by APO or SMO.
Distribution:
(1)  Sample Management Office (SMO)
(2)  Region-Client (Technical Project Officer (TPO))
(3)  Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory (£MSL-LV)
(4)  National Enforcement Investigations Center (NEIC)

*         Copy also required in the Sample  Data  Summary Package.

**        Sample Delivery Group (SDG)  is a  group of samples within a Case,
          received over a period of 14 days or less and not exceeding 20
          samples.  Data for all samples in the  SDG are due concurrently.   The
          date of delivery of the SDG  or any samples within the SDG is the
          date that all samples have been delivered.   (See Exhibit A for
          further description.)

***       Concurrent  delivery required.   Delivery  shall be made such that all
          designated  recipients receive the item on the same calendar day.

****      Complete SDG File will contain the original sample data package plus
          all of the  original documents described  under Section II, Part E.

*****     See Exhibit E for a more detailed description.
NOTE:     As specified in the Contract Schedule  (G.2 Government Furnished
          Supplies and Materials), unless otherwise instructed by SMO, the
          Contractor  shall dispose of unused sample volume and used sample
          bottles/containers no earlier than 60  days following submission of
          analytical  data.

Distribution Addresses:

(1)  USEPA Contract Laboratory Program
     Sample Management Office
     P.O. Box 818
     Alexandria, VA  22314

     For overnight delivery service, use street address:
     300 North Lee Street
     Alexandria, VA  22314

(2)  USEPA Regions:

     SMO, acting on behalf of the APO, will provide  the Contractor with the
     list of addressees for the  10 EPA Regions.  SMO will  provide  the

                                    B-4                       DFLM01.1  (9/91)

-------
     Contractor with updated Regional address/name  lists  as necessary
     throughout the  period of the contract and identify other client
     recipients on a case-by-case basis.

(3)   USEPA Environmental  Monitoring Systems Laboratory
     P.O.  Box 93478
     Las Vegas,  NV  89193-3478
     ATTN:   Data Audit Staff

     For overnight delivery service,  use  street address:
     944 E.  Harmon,  Executive Center
     Las Vegas,  NV  89109
     ATTN:   Data Audit Staff

(4)   USEPA National  Enforcement  Investigations Center (NEIC)
     Attn:   CLP Audit Program
     Denver Federal  Center Building 53
     P. 0.  Box 25227
     Denver,  CO 80225
                                   B-5                       DFLM01.1  (9/91)

-------
                                  SECTION II


              REPORT DESCRIPTIONS AND ORDER OF DATA DELIVERABLES


The Contractor shall provide reports and other deliverables as specified in
the Contract Schedule (Reporting Requirements and Deliverables, F.2). The
required content and form of each deliverable are described in this exhibit.

All reports and documentation MUST BE:

     o  Legible.

     o  Clearly  labeled  and completed in accordance with instructions  in this
        exhibit.

     o  Arranged in the  order  specified in  this  se'ction.

     o  Paginated consecutively  in ascending  order starting from  the SDG
        Narrative.

If submitted documentation does not conform to the above criteria, the
Contractor shall be required to resubmit such documentation with deficiencies
corrected, at no additional cost to the Government.

Whenever the Contractor is required to submit or resubmit data as a result of
an onsite laboratory evaluation or through an APO/TPO action,  the data must
be clearly marked as ADDITIONAL DATA and must be sent to all three
contractual data recipients (SMO, EMSL-LV and the Region).  A cover letter
shall be included which describes what data are being delivered, to which EPA
Case(s) the data pertain, and who requested the data.

Whenever the Contractor is required to submit or resubmit data as a result of
contract compliance screening by SMO, the data must be sent to all three
contractual data recipients (SMO, EMSL-LV and the Region).  In all three
instances the data must be accompanied by a color-coded Cover Sheet
(Laboratory Response To Results of Contract Compliance Screening) provided by
SMO.

Section III of this exhibit contains forms instructions to assist the
Contractor in accurately providing EPA with all required data.  Section IV
contains copies of the required data reporting forms in EPA-specified
formats.

Descriptions of the requirements for each deliverable item cited in Reporting
Requirements and Deliverables  (Contract Schedule, Section F) are specified in
this section.  Items submitted concurrently MUST BE arranged in the order
listed.  Additionally, the components of each item MUST BE arranged in the
order presented in this section when the item is submitted.  Examples of
specific data deliverables not included herein may be obtained by submitting
a written request to the APO,  stating the information requested and signed by
the Laboratory Manager.
                                    B-6                        DFLM01.1 (9/91)

-------
A.   Quality Assurance Plan and Standard Operating Procedures

     See Exhibits E and F for requirements.

B.   Sample Traffic Reports

     The original Sample Traffic Report (TR) page marked "Lab Copy for Return
     to SMO" shall be delivered with laboratory receipt information and
     signed in original Contractor signature, for each sample in the SDG.
     TRs shall be submitted in SDG sets (i.e.,  TRs for all samples in a SDG
     shall be clipped together) with a SDG Cover Sheet attached.

     The SDG Cover Sheet shall contain the following items:

          o  Laboratory name.

          o  Contract number.

          o  Sample analysis price - full sample price from the EPA contract.

          o  Case number.
          o  List of EPA sample numbers of all samples in the SDG,
             identifying the first and last samples received and their dates
             of receipt (LRDs).
                                    B-7                        DFLM01.1 (9/91)

-------
    NOTE:   When more than one sample is received in the first or last SDG
            shipment, the "first"  sample received would be the lowest sample
            number (considering both alpha and numeric designations); the
            "last" sample received would be the highest sample number
            (considering both alpha and numeric designations).

    In addition,  each TR must be  clearly marked with the SDG number,  the
    sample number of the first sample in the  SDG (as described in the
    following paragraph).  This information should be entered below the
    laboratory receipt date on the TR.   In addition,  the TR for the last
    sample received in the SDG must be clearly marked "SDG - FINAL SAMPLE."

    The EPA sample number of the  first sample received in the SZ/o is the SDG
    number.   When several &
-------
The Contractor shall retain a copy of the Sample Data Package for 365
days after final acceptance of data.  After this time, the Contractor
may dispose of the package.

1.   SDG Narrative

     This document shall he clearly labeled "SDG Narrative" and shall
     contain:   laboratory name;  Case number;  sample numbers in the SDG,
     differentiating between initial analyses and reanalyses; SDG number;
     Contract number; and detailed documentation of any quality control,
     sample, shipment and/or analytical problems encountered in
     processing the samples reported in the data package.

     Whenever- data from sample reanalyses are submitted,  the Contractor
     shall state in the SDG Narrative for each reanalysis, whether it
     considers the reanalysis to be billable, %and if so,  why.

     The Contractor must also include any problems encountered,  both
     technical and administrative, the corrective actions taken and the
     resolutions,  and an explanation for all flagged edits (i.e.,  manual
     edits) on quantitation lists.

     NOTE:   If a column is used  that has different first and last
             eluting isomers than the DB-5 column, the Contractor shall
             fully document, in the SDG Narrative, the order of elution
             of the  isomers and identify the  first and last eluting
             isomers for that particular column for the window defining
             mix and CC3 solution.

     The SDG Narrative shall contain the following statement, verbatim:
     "I certify that this data package is in compliance with the terms
     and conditions of the contract, both technically and for
     completeness, for other than the conditions detailed above.  Release
     of the data contained in this hardcopy data package has been
     authorized by the Laboratory Manager or his designee, as verified by
     the following signature."  This statement shall be directly followed
     by the signature of the Laboratory Manager or his designee with a
     typed line below it containing the signer's name and title, and the
     date of signature.  Additionally, the SDG Narrative itself must be
     signed in original signature by the Laboratory Manager or his
     designee and dated.  All copies of the SDG Narrative shall be signed
     in original signature.

2.   Traffic Reports

     A copy of the TRs submitted in Part A for all of the samples in the
     SDG shall be delivered.  The TRs shall be arranged in increasing EPA
     sample numbering order, considering both letters and numbers in
     ordering samples.   Copies of the SDG Cover Sheet shall be included
     with the copies of the TRs.

     If samples are received at the laboratory with multi-sample TRs, all
     the samples on one multi- sample TR may not necessarily be in the


                               B-9                              DFLM01.0

-------
same SDG.  In this instance, the Contractor must make the
appropriate number of photocopies of the TR so that a copy is
submitted with each data package to which the TR applies.

In addition, in any instance where samples from more than one multi-
sample TR are in the a*sae data pa:'     , _nj Contractor must submit a
copy of the SDG Cover Sheet with copies of the TRs.

PCDD/PCDF Data

a.   Sample Data -  in order by EPA sample number

     (1)  Target Compound List Results  (Form I PCDD-1).

     (2)  Calculation of the Toxicity Equivalence (Form I PCDD-2).

     (3)  Second Column Confirmation Summary (Form I PCDD-3).

          If the TEF is greater than the limits specified in Exhibit
          D,  analysis on a column capable  of resolving  all 2378-
          substituted PCDDs/PCDFs is required.

     (4)  Selected  Ion Current Profile  (SICP)  for each  sample and
          each analysis of each sample.   SICPs must contain the
          following header information:

          o  EPA sample number.

          o  Date and  time of analysis.
          o  GC/MS instrument ID.
          o  Lab file  ID.

     (5)  Total Congener Concentration  Results (Form II PCDD).

b.   Quality Control Data

     (1)  Spiked Sample Results (Form III  PCDD-1) - in  order by EPA
          sample number.

     (2)  Duplicate Sample Results (Form III PCDD-2) -  in order by
          EPA sample number.

     (3)  Method Blank Summary (Form IV PCDD)  - in order by EPA
          sample number assigned to  the blanks.

     (4)  Window Defining Mix Summary (Form V PCDD-1) - in order by
          EPA sample number assigned to the window defining mix.

     (5)  Chromatographic Resolution Summary (Form V PCDD-2) - in
          order by  EPA sample number assigned to the standard used
          to evaluate the column resolution.
                          B-10                             DFLM01.0

-------
              (6)  SICP for each analysis above [b.(l) - (5)].  SICPs must
                   contain the header information described in a. (4) above.

         c.   Calibration Data

              (,    Inicial Calibration Dati (Form VI PCDD-1 and Form VI PCDD-
                   2) - in order by instrument, if more than one instrument
                   used.

                   (a)  PCDD/PCDF standard(s)  SICPs for the initial (five-
                        point) calibration shall be labeled as stated above.

                   (b)  When more than one initial calibration is performed,
                        the data must be arranged in chronological order by
                        instrument.

              (2)  Continuing Calibration Data (Form VII PCDD-1 and Form VII
                   PCDD-2) - in order by instrument, if more than one
                   instrument is used.

                   (a)  PCDD/PCDF standard(s)  SICPs for all continuing
                        calibrations shall be  labeled as stated above.

                   (b)  When more than one continuing calibration is
                        performed,  the data must be arranged in chronological
                        order, by instrument.

         d.   Raw Quality Control Data

              (1)  Blank Data - in order by EPA sample number assigned to the
                   blank.  SICPs shall be submitted for each blank analyzed
                   and labeled as above.

              (2)  Spiked Sample Data - in order by EPA sample number.  SICPs
                   shall be submitted for each spiked sample analyzed and
                   labeled as above.

E.   Complete SPG File

     One Complete SDG File (CSF),  including the original Sample Data Package,
     shall  be delivered to the Region concurrently with delivery of the
     Sample Data Package to SMO and EMSL-LV.   The contents  of the CSF will be
     numbered according to the specifications  described in  Sections III and
     IV. The Document Inventory Sheet,  Form DC-2,  is contained in Section
     IV. The CSF will contain all original documents where possible.   No
     copies will be placed in the CSF unless the originals  are bound in a
     logbook which is maintained by the laboratory.   The CSF will contain all
     original documents specified in Sections  III and IV, and Form DC-2.

     The CSF will consist of the following original documents in addition to
     the documents in the Sample Data Package:

     1.   Original Sample Data Package.


                                   B-ll                              DFLM01.0

-------
2.   A completed and signed Document Inventory Sheet (Form DC-2).

3.   All original shipping documents including, but not limited to, the
     following:

     a.   EPA Chain-of-Custody Record.

     b.   Airbills.

     c.   EPA Traffic Reports.

     d.   Sample tags (if present)  sealed in plastic bags.

4.   All original receiving documents including, but not limited to, the
     following:
                                              k
     a.   Form DC-1.

     b.   Other receiving forms or  copies of receiving logbooks.

     c.   SDG Cover  Sheet.

5.   All original laboratory records, not already submitted in the Sample
     Data Package, of sample transfer,  preparation and analysis
     including, but not limited to, the following:

     a.   Original preparation and  analysis  forms or copies of
          preparation and analysis  logbook pages.

     b.   Internal sample and sample extract transfer chain-of-custody
          records.

     c.   Screening  records.

     d.   All instrument output, including strip charts from screening
          activities.

6.   All other original SDG-specific documents in the possession of the
     laboratory, including, but not limited to, the following:

     a.   Telephone  contact logs.

     b.   Copies of personal logbook pages.

     c.   All hand-written Case-specific notes.

     d.   Any other Case-specific documents  not covered by the above.

     NOTE:    All Case-related documentation may be  used or admitted as
              evidence in subsequent legal proceedings.   Any other SDG-
              specific documents generated after the CSF is sent  to EPA,
              as well as copies that are altered in  any fashion,  are also
              deliverables to EPA  (original  to the Region,  and copies to
              SMO and EMSL-LV).

                               B-12                             DFLM01.0

-------
               If the  laboratory does  submit  SOG-specific documents  to  EPA
               after submission of the CSF, the documents should be  numbered
               as an addendum to the CSF,  and a revised DC-2  Form  should be
               submitted,  or the documents should be numbered as a new  CSF,
               and a new DC-2 Form should  be  submitted to the Regions only.

F.   GC/MS Tapes

     The Contractor must store all raw and processed GC/MS  data on magnetic
     tape in appropriate instrument manufacturer's format.   This tape must
     include data for samples, blanks, initial calibrations and continuing
     calibrations, as well as all laboratory-generated quantitation reports
     and SICPs required to generate the data package.   The  Contractor shall
     maintain a written reference logbook of tape  files to  EPA sample number,
     calibration data, standards and blanks.   The  logbook should include EPA
     sample numbers and standard and blank IDs,  identified by Case and SDG.

     The Contractor is required to retain the GC/HS tapes for 365  days  after
     data submission.   During that time, the Contractor shall submit tapes
     and associated logbook pages within seven days after receipt  of a
     written request from the APO or EMSL-LV.

     When submitting GC/MS tapes to EPA, the following materials must be
     delivered in response to the request:

     1.   All associated raw data files for  samples, blanks,  matrix  spikes,
          initial and  continuing calibration standards, and window defining
          mix solutions.

     2.   All processed data files and quantitation output  files associated
          with the raw data files described  above.

     3.   All associated identifications and calculation files  used to
          generate the data submitted in the  data  package.

     4.   A copy of the Contractor's  written reference logbook  relating tape
          files to EPA sample number,  calibration  data, standards, blanks  and
          matrix spikes.  The logbook must include EPA sample numbers and lab
          file identifiers for all samples,  blanks and standards,  identified
          by Case and SDG.

     The laboratory must also provide a statement attesting to the
     completeness of the GC/MS data tape submission, signed and dated by the
     Laboratory Manager.  This statement must be part of a cover sheet that
     includes the following  information relevant to the data tape submission:

     1.   Laboratory name.

     2.   Date of submission.

     3.   Case number.

     4.   SDG number.
                                   B-13                       DFLM01.1 (9/91)

-------
     5.    GC/MS make  and model number.

     6.    Software version.

     7.    Disk drive  type  (e.g.,  CDC, PRIAM).

     8.    File transfer method  (e.g., DSD, DTD, FTP, Aquarius).

     9.    Names and telephone numbers of  two laboratory contacts  for  further
          information regarding  the  submission.
G.   Extracts
     The Contractor shall preserve sample extracts in the dark at room
     temperature in bottles/vials with Teflon-lined septa.   Extract
     bottles/vials shall be labeled with EPA sample number,  Case number and
     SDG number.  A logbook of stored extracts,  listing EPA sample numbers
     and associated Case and SDG numbers, shall  be maintained.

     The Contractor is required to retain extracts for 365 days following
     data submission.  During that time, the Contractor shall submit extracts
     and associated logbook pages within seven days following receipt of a
     written request from the APO or SMO.
                                    B-14                             DFLM01.0

-------
                                 SECTION III


                           FORM INSTRUCTION GUIDE


This section includes specific instructions for the completion of all
required forms.  These instructions are arranged in the following order:

A.  General Information and Header  Information

B.  PCDD/PCDF Sample Data (Form I PCDD-1,  PCDD-2  and PCDD-3)

C.  PCDD/PCDF Total Congener  Concentration Summary  (Form II)

D.  PCDD/PCDF Spiked Sample and Duplicate  Sample  Results (Form III PCDD-1 and
    PCDD-2)

E.  PCDD/PCDF Method Blank Summary  (Form IV)

F.  PCDD/PCDF Window Defining Mix Summary,  Chromatographic Resolution
    Summary, and Analytical Sequence (Form V PCDD-1,  PCDD-2 and PCDD-3)

G.  PCDD/PCDF Initial Calibration Data Summary (Form VI PCDD-1 and PCDD-2)

H.  PCDD/PCDF Continuing Calibration Data Summary (Form VII PCDD-1 and PCDD-
    2)

I.  Sample Log-In Sheet (Form DC-1)

J.  Document Inventory Sheet  (Form  DC-2)
                                    B-15                              DFLM01.0

-------
A.   General Information and Header Information

     The data reporting forms presented in Section IV have been designed in
     anticipation of the development of a computer-readable data format.
     Although a "diskette deliverable" is not a requirement at this time, the
     design of the data reporting forms have taken such a future requirement
     into consideration.  Therefore, the specific length of each field on the
     forms is the approximate length that would be included in a data element
     dictionary, with exceptions made in some instances for additional space
     on the hardcopy forms for visual clarity.

     All characters which appear on the data reporting forms presented in
     Section IV must be reproduced by the Contractor when submitting data,
     and the format of the f._js submitted must be identical to that shown in
     the contract.  No information may be added, deleted, or moved from its
     specified position without prior written approval of the APO.  The names
     of the various fields and compounds (e.g., "Lab Code," "2378-TCDD") must
     appear as they do on the forms in the contract, including the options
     specified in the form (i.e., "Matrix:  (Soil/Water/Waste/Ash)" must
     appear, not just "Matrix").  For items appearing on the uncompleted
     forms (Section IV), the use of uppercase and lowercase letters is
     optional.

     Alphabetic entries made onto the forms by the Contractor shall be in ALL
     UPPERCASE letters (e.g., "SOIL," not "Soil" or "soil").  If an entry
     does not fill the entire blank space provided on the form, null
     characters shall be used to remove the remaining underscores that
     comprise the blank line.  However, do not remove the underscores or
     vertical bar characters that delineate "boxes" on the forms.  The only
     exception would be those underscores at the bottom of a "box" that are
     intended as a data entry line. (For instance, on Form II, if data must
     be entered on the last line of the box, it will replace the
     underscores) .

     Six pieces of information are common to the header section of each data
     reporting form.  They are Lab Name, Contract, Lab Code, Case No., SAS
     No., and SDG No.  Except as noted below for SAS No., this information
     must be entered on every form and must match on every form.

     The "Lab Name" shall be the name chosen by the Contractor to identify
     the laboratory.  It may not exceed 25 characters.

     The "Lab Code" is an alpha-numeric abbreviation of up to six letters and
     numbers assigned by EPA to  identify the laboratory and aid in data
     processing.  This lab code  shall be assigned by EPA at the time a
     contract is  awarded and shall not be modified by the Contractor, except
     at the direction of EPA.  If a change of name or ownership occurs at the
     laboratory,  the lab code will  remain the same unless and until the
     Contractor  is directed by EPA  to use another lab code assigned by EPA.

     The  "Case No." is  the EPA-assigned Case number associated with the
     sample and reported on  the  Traffic Report  or sample shipping paperwork.
                                    B-16                             DFLM01.0

-------
 The  "Contract"  is  the  number  of  the  EPA contract  under which the
 analyses  were performed.

 The  "SDG  No." is the EPA  sample  number  of  the  first  sample  received in
 the  SDG.  When  several samples are received  together in the first  SDG
 shipment, the SDG  number  shall b* the lowest sample  numbe-  (considering
 both alpha  and  numeric designations) in the  first group of  samples
 received  under  the SDG.

 The  "SAS  No." is the EPA-assigned number for analyses  performed under
 Special Analytical Services (SAS).   If  samples are to  be analyzed  under
 SAS  only  and reported  on  these forms, then enter  "SAS  No.,"  and leave
 "Case No."  blank.   If  samples are analyzed according to the Routine
 Analytical  Services (IFB) protocols  and have additional SAS
 requirements, enter both  "Case No."  and "SAS No." on all forms.  If  the
 analyses have no SAS requirements, leave "SAS No." blank.   NOTE:   Some
 samples in  a SDG may have a SAS  No., while others do not.

 The  other information  common to  most of the  forms is the "EPA Sample
 No."  This  number  appears either in  the  upper right-hand corner of the
 form, or  as the left column of a table  summarizing data from a number of
 samples.  When  the "EPA Sample No."  is  entered into  the  triple-spaced
 box  in the  upper right-hand corner of Form I, III or IV, it  should be
 entered on  the middle  line of the three  lines that comprise  the box.

 All  samples, spiked samples, duplicate  samples, blanks  and standards
 shall be  identified with an EPA  sample number.   For  field samples,
 spiked samples, and duplicates samples,   the  EPA sample number is based
 on the unique identifying number given  in the Traffic Report or sample
 shipping records for that sample.

 In order to facilitate data assessment,   the  following  sample suffixes
 must be used:

 XXXXX       -   EPA sample number
 XXXXXS      -   Spiked  aliquot of sample "XXXXX"
 XXXXXD      -   Duplicate  aliquot of  sample "XXXXX"
 XXXXXRE     -   Reextracted  and reanalyzed  aliquot of sample "XXXXX"
 XXXXXDL     -   Diluted analysis  of sample  "XXXXX"

 Form V PCDD-3 requires that all  samples analyzed in  a  given  12-hour
 analytical  sequence be listed, regardless of whether or not  they are
 part  of the SDG being  reported,  and regardless of whether or not they
 are  EPA samples.   Therefore, use "ZZZZZ" as  the EPA  sample number  for
 any  sample  analysis not associated with  the  SDG being reported.

 For blanks  and standards,  the following  identification  scheme must be
used as the "EPA Sample No."

 1.   Method blanks  shall be  identified as DFBLK##.
                              B-17                       DF1M01.1 (9/91)

-------
2.   Calibration standards shall be identified as CC1##, CC2##, CC3##,
     CC4## and CC5##, corresponding to the calibration solutions
     identified in Exhibit D.

3.   The window defining mixture shall be identified as WDM##.

4.   The column performance solution shall be identified as CPS##.

The "EPA Sample No." must be unique within a SDG.  Therefore, the
Contractor must replace the two-character "##" terminator of the
identifier with one or two characters or numbers, or a combination of
both, to create a unique EPA sample number for each blank and standard
within the SDG.  For example, possible identifiers for method blanks
would be DFBLK1, DFBLK2, DFBLKAl, DFBLKB2, DFB1KAB, etc.

Several other pieces of information are common to many of the data
reporting forms.  These include "Matrix," "LalS Sample ID," "Lab File
ID," "Instrument," and "GC Column."

For "Matrix," enter  "SOIL" for a soil/sediment sample, "WATER" for an
aqueous sample, and  "WASTE" for a chemical waste sample, including the
matrices of oily sludge, wet fuel oil, stillbottoms, oils, or other
materials significantly contaminated with these matrices.  Enter "ASH"
for fly ash samples.

"Lab Sample ID" is an optional laboratory-generated internal identifier.
Up to 12 alpha-numeric characters may be reported here.  If the
Contractor does not have a lab sample ID, this field may be left blank.
However, if this identifier is used on any of the forms, or accompanying
hardcopy data deliverables, it must be reported on all the appropriate
forms.

"Lab File ID" is the laboratory-generated name of the GC/MS data system
file containing information pertaining to a particular analysis.  Up to
14 alpha-numeric characters may be used here.

"Instrument" is common to many of the forms, particularly those
containing calibration data.  The identifier used by the laboratory must
include some indication of the manufacturer and/or model of the
instrument, and contain additional characters or numbers that
differentiate between all  instruments of the same type  in the
laboratory.  The instrument  identifier must be consistent on all forms
within  the SDG.

"GC  Column" and "ID  (mm)"  are common to various  other forms.  These two
fields  are to be used to  identify the stationary phase  of the GC column
(previously called GC Column ID), and the internal diameter of  the GC
column  in millimeters  (mm).  For packed columns, convert the  ID from
inches  to millimeters as  necessary, and enter in the  "ID" field.

For  rounding off numbers  to  the appropriate level of precision, observe
the  following  common rules.  If the figure following  those to be
retained is less than  5,  drop it  (round down).   If the  figure  is  greater
than 5,  drop  it and  increase the  last digit to be retained by 1 (round

                              B-18                              DFLM01.0

-------
up).  If the figure following the last digit to be retained equals 5,
round up if the digit to be retained is odd, and round down if that
digit is even.

PCDD/PCDF Sample Data

1.   Form I PCDD-1

     This form is used for tabulating and reporting the sample analysis
     results for target analytes.  It is related to Form I PCDD-2, and
     for each sample for which there is a Form I PCDD-1,  there must be a
     corresponding Form I PCDD-2.

     Complete all header information according to the instructions in
     Part A and as follows:

     Enter the "Matrix" of the sample being analyzed.  The designation
     of matrix must reflect which one of the matrix-specific extraction
     procedures in Exhibit D was used for extraction of the sample.

     For "Sample wt/vol," enter the number of grams (for soil) or
     milliliters (for water) of sample used in the first blank line,  and
     the units, either "G" or "ML," in the second blank.

     For water samples, indicate the extraction procedure used by
     entering "SEPF" for separatory funnel extraction or "CONT" for
     continuous liquid-liquid extraction in the field labeled "Water
     Sample Prep."

     Enter the actual volume of the most concentrated sample extract, in
     microliters, under "Cone. Extract Volume:"  This volume will
     typically be 100 microliters,  although this volume is split into
     two aliquots before analysis.

     Enter "GC Column," "Instrument," "Lab Sample ID," and "Lab File ID"
     as described in Part A.

     "Date Received" is the date of sample receipt at the laboratory, as
     noted on the Traffic Report (i.e., the validated time of sample
     receipt, VTSR) for that sample.  It must be entered as MM/DD/YY.

     "Date Extracted" and "Date Analyzed" must also be entered as
     MM/DD/YY.  If continuous liquid-liquid extraction procedures are
     used for water samples, enter the date on which the procedure was
     started as the "Date Extracted."  If separatory funnel procedures
     are used for water samples, enter the date on which the procedure  .
     was completed.  The "Date Analyzed" must be the date of the
     analysis for which the results are reported on Form I.  (If the
     sample requires a second column confirmation and is reported on
     Form I PCDD-3, the "Date Analyzed" on Form I PCDD-3 must be the
     date of the second analysis, while the date on Form I PCDD-1 and
     PCDD-2 will be the date of the first analysis.)
                               B-19                              DFLM01.0

-------
If the sample has been diluted for analysis, enter the "Dilution
Factor" as a single number, not a fraction.  For example, enter
"100.0" for a 1 to 100 dilution of the extract.  Enter "0.1" for a
concentration of 10 to 1.  If the sample was not diluted, enter
"1.0."

NOTE:    "Dilution" refers  to sample handling steps other  than  those
         outlined  in Exhibit D.  If the weight  or volume of  the
         sample  taken  for extraction is not  the weight or  volume
         specified in  the protocol, this  is  not a dilution but  is
         accounted for in the weight/volume  term.  A dilution refers
         specifically  to  the addition of  clean  solvent to  a  measured
         volume  of the most concentrated  sample extract.

The appropriate concentration units,  "NG/L" for water samples or
"UG/KG" for all other matrices, must be entered in the field for
"CONCENTRATION UNITS:"

For each analyte detected in a sample,  enter the absolute retention
time of the detected peak under "PEAK RT."  Enter the retention
time in minutes .and decimal minutes,  not seconds or minutes and
seconds.  The retention time must be entered even if the peak did
not meet all of the identification criteria in Exhibit D.

Enter the ion abundance ratio for the two m/z's. (listed under
"Selected Ions") in the column labeled "ION RATIO."  If the ion
abundance ratio falls outside the acceptance limits listed in
Exhibit D, place an asterisk (*) in the column under the number (#)
symbol.

For target analytes that meet all the identification criteria in
Exhibit D, the Contractor shall report the concentrations detected
as uncorrected for blank contaminants in the column in the lower
portion of the form labeled "CONCENTRATION."  Report all results to
two significant figures.

Under the column labeled "Q" for qualifier, flag each result with
the specific data reporting qualifiers listed below.  The
Contractor is encouraged to use additional  flags as needed, but the
definition of such flags must be explicit, must not contradict the
qualifiers listed below, and must be included  in the accompanying
Narrative.

For reporting results to EPA, the following contract-specific
qualifiers are  to be  used.  The seven qualifiers listed below  are
not subject to modification by the laboratory.  Up to five
qualifiers may be reported on Form I for each  analyte.

The seven EPA-defined qualifiers to be used are as follows:

U -  Indicates compound was analyzed for but not detected.  The
     CONCENTRATION column  is left blank  in  this instance, and an
     estimated detection limit (EDL) must be calculated based on
     the signal-to-noise ratio, as described in Exhibit D.  This

                          B-20                              DFLM01.0

-------
     calculation takes into account the sample weight/volume
     extracted,  the volume of the most concentrated extract, the
     injection volume, and dilution of the most concentrated
     extract prior to analysis.   The calculation does not consider
     the percent solids content  of the sample, as all results are
     reported on a wet weight basis.

J -   Indicates an estimated value.   This flag is used when the mass
     spectral data indicate presence of an analyte meeting all the
     identification criteria in  Exhibit D,  but the result is less
     than the sample quantitation limit, but greater than zero.

fi -   This flag is used when the  analyte is found in the associated
     blank as well as in the sample.   It indicates
     possible/probable blank contamination and warns the data user
     to take appropriate action.

E-   This flag identifies analytes  whose concentrations exceed the
     calibration range of the GC/MS instrument for that specific
     analysis.  If one or more compounds have a response greater
     than full scale, except as  noted in Exhibit D, the sample
     extract must be diluted and reanalyzed according to the
     specifications in Exhibit D.   All such compounds with a
     response greater than full  scale should have the concentration
     flagged "E" on the Form I for  the original analysis.  If the
     dilution of the extract causes any compounds identified in the
     first analysis to be below  the calibration range in the second
     analysis, the results of both  analyses shall be reported on
     separate copies of Form I.   The Form I for the diluted sample
     shall have the "DL" suffix  appended to the EPA sample number.

D -   This flag indicates all compounds identified in an analysis at
     a secondary dilution factor.   If a sample extract is
     reanalyzed at a higher dilution factor,  as in the "E" flag
     above, the "DL" suffix is appended to the EPA sample number on
     the Form I for the diluted  sample,  and all concentration
     values reported on that Form I are flagged with the "D" flag.
     This flag alerts data users that any discrepancies between the
     concentrations reported may be due to dilution of the sample
     extract.

S-   This flag indicates that the analyte in question is, in the
     opinion of the GC/MS Interpretation Specialist, a PCDD/PCDF,
     even though the M-[COC1]+ ion did not meet the requirement of
     2.5 times signal-to-noise (see Exhibit D, Section 11.3).

H -   This flag indicates that the analyte in question was
     quantitated using peak heights rather than peak areas for both
     the analyte and its internal standard (see Exhibit D, Section
     11.4).

X -   Other specific flags may be required to properly define the
     results.  If used, they must be fully described, and such
     description must be attached to the Sample Data Summary

                          B-21                             DFLM01.0

-------
         Package and the SDG Narrative.  Begin using "X."  If more than
         one flag is needed, use "Y" and "Z" as needed.  The
         laboratory-defined flags are limited to the letters "X," "Y,"
         and "Z."

    The combination of flags "BU" or "UB"  is expressly prohibited.
    Blank contaminants are flagged  "B" only when they are detected in
    the sample associated with the  blank.

    If a peak detected in the sample meets all of  the identification
    criteria except the ion abundance ratio, flag  the ion ratio as
    indicated above, and report the "Estimated Maximum Possible
    Concentration" as calculated in Exhibit D under the  "EMPC/EDL"
    column.  Do not report the value of the EMPC under the column
    labeled "CONCENTRATION," as that column is only for  analytes
    meeting all the identification  criteria.

    If an analyte was not detected  in the  sample,  enter  "U" in the
    qualifier column, as described  above,  and report the Estimated
    Detection Limit" as calculated  in Exhibit D under the "EMPC/EDL"
    column.  Do not report the value of the EDL if there is an entry
    under "CONCENTRATION."  The presence of the "U" alerts the data
    user that the reported value is an EDL, otherwise it is assumed to
    be -an EMPC.

    The bottom portion of Form I PCDD-1 contains the fields for
    reporting the recoveries of the internal standard and the cleanup
    standard.  The recoveries of these standards are crucial in
    evaluating the effectiveness of this isotope dilution method.  For
    each internal standard and the  cleanup standard, enter the absolute
    retention time of the standard  in the  sample in minutes and decimal
    minutes, as above.  Report the  ion abundance ratio of each of the
    five internal standards under the "ION RATIO"  column.  Flag any ion
    ratios that fall outside the ion ratio limits  listed on the form by
    placing an asterisk (*) in the  column  under the number (#) symbol.
    There is no ion abundance ratio for the cleanup standard, as only
    one ion is monitored.

    Report the percent recovery of  the internal standards and the
    cleanup standard, calculated according to Exhibit D, under the
    "%REC" column.  The quality control limits for recovery are listed
    on  the form.  Flag any  recovery outside those  limits by placing an
    asterisk  (*) under the  number  (#)  symbol in the recovery column.
    Requirements for reanalysis of  samples due to  poor recoveries are
    given in Exhibit D.

2.  Form I PCDD-2, Toxicity Equivalence Summary

    This page of Form I is  used to  report  the results  of the toxicity
    equivalence  calculations for each  sample analyzed.   The
    concentration of each of the 2,3,7,8-substituted PCDD and PCDF
     isomers  is multiplied by a toxicity equivalence factor  (TEF), as
    described in Exhibit  D, to arrive  at a concentration of  2,3,7,8-
    TCDD with an equivalent toxicity.  The total of all  the  toxic

                              B-22                             DFLM01.0

-------
          equivalents  determines whether or not the sample needs to be
          analyzed on  a second GC column to more completely separate the
          2378-TCDF from all other TCDD and TCDF isomers (see Exhibit D).

          Complete the header information as above.   ThQ header of Form I
          PCDD-2 must  match the header of Form I PCDD-1  for the same sample.

          For  each 2,3,7,8-substituted isomer positively identified in the
          sample,  enter the concentration found in the column labeled
          "CONCENTRATION."  If an isomer was not detected,  i.e.,  flagged "U"
          on Form  I PCDD-1,  for the purposes of this calculation,  enter 0.0
          (zero) as the concentration.   EMPC values are  not included in the
          TEF  calculations under this  SOW.

          Multiply each concentration  times the TEF listed on the  form for
          that isomer,  and enter the product of the two  in the column labeled
          "TEF-ADJUSTED CONCENTRATION."  Add all 17 TEF-adjusted
          concentrations together,  including any zeros,  and enter  the total
          on the line  at the bottom of the  form.

          If the total TEF-adjusted concentration is greater than  the values
          listed at the bottom of the  form and in Exhibit D,  then  a second
          column confirmation analysis is required (see  Exhibit D).

     3.    Form I PCDD-3,  Second Column Confirmation Results

          This page of Form I is used  to report the results of all second
          column confirmation analyses performed.   The requirements for
          second column confirmation are discussed above and in Exhibit D.
          Each time a  second column confirmation is performed,  the results
          are  reported on Form I PCDD-3.

          Complete the header information as above,  except note that the
          fields for "GC Column" and "Date  Analyzed" must correspond to the
          second column confirmation analysis,  i.e.,  they must not match
          those fields in the header of Form I PCDD-1 or PCDD-2.   Other
          fields such  as "Instrument," "Dilution Factor," and "Lab File ID"
          may  also differ and must correspond to the second column
          confirmation analysis.

          Complete the information in  the lower portion  of the form in a
          fashion  similar to that for  Form I PCDD-1,  but entering  the results
          of the second column confirmation.

          Enter the data on recovery of the internal standards and cleanup
          standard from the second column confirmation analysis in a fashion
          similar  to that for the original  analysis.

C.   PCDD/PCDF Total Congener Concentration Summary (Form II)

     This form is  used to report the total concentration of all PCDD/PCDF
     isomers  in a  given homologue that are detected in the sample, including
     those isomers that do not represent the 2,3,7,8-substituted isomers of
     greatest  toxicological concern.  Because there are  many isomers in each

                                   B-23                              DFLM01.0

-------
     homologue, it is necessary to indicate the number of peaks that
     represent isomers within the homologue.  Enter the number of peaks
     detected in each homologue under "PEAKS."  For instance,  if three FeCDD
     peaks are detected and summed together, enter "3" under "PEAKS."

     Lncer the concentration of the total homologue,  as calculated in Exhibit
     D,  under "CONCENTRATION."  Enter qualifiers under the "Q" column, as
     described above.  If no isomers in a homologue were detected, enter "U"
     as  the qualifier, and enter the lowest EDL of any of the  2,3,7,8-
     substituted isomers under the "EMPC/EDL" column.

     If  any of the peaks in a homologue meet all the identification criteria
     except the ion abundance ratio, then.report the total concentration as
     an  EMPC under the "EMPC/EDL" column.

D.   PCDD/PCDF Spiked Sample and Duplicate Sample Results (Form III)

     1.    PCDD/PCDF Spiked Sample Summary (Form III PCDD-1)

          This page of Form III is used to report the  accuracy of the spiked
          sample analysis,  measured as  recovery of the 10 spiked analytes.
          Because some of the analytes  may also be present in  the unspiked
          aliquot of the sample,  results for both the  unspiked and spiked
          analyses are reported on Form III.

          Complete the header information as in Part A.   Enter the EPA sample
          number for the spiked sample  aliquot in the  box at the top of the
          form.  Similarly, the lab sample ID and lab  file ID  must refer to
          the spiked sample analysis.

          Enter the "Spike Added" of each of the 10 analytes in picograms
          (pg).  In the column labeled  "Spiked Sample  Result," enter the
          concentration (or EMPC) of each analyte detected in  the spiked
          sample aliquot.  The concentration units must be those indicated at
          the top of the form and be appropriate to the sample matrix listed
          in the header.  Enter the concentration (or  EMPC)  of each analyte
          detected in the original analysis of the unspiked sample aliquot.
          If an analyte was not detected in the unspiked aliquot, enter zero
          in place of the concentration, and use this  value in the
          calculations described in Exhibit D.  Calculate the  recovery of
          each spiked analyte as described in Exhibit  D, and enter this value
          to the nearest whole percentage point in the column  labeled "%REC.n
          Flag any recoveries outside the quality control limits listed on
          the form by placing an asterisk (*) in the column under the number
          (#) symbol.

          In addition to Form III PCDD-1, a copy of Form I must be completed
          for the spiked sample analysis as well, following the procedures
          described above.

     2.    PCDD/PCDF Duplicate Sample Summary  (Form III PCDD-2)

          This page of Form III is used to report the precision of the
          duplicate sample analysis, measured as the relative  percent

                                    B-24                             DFLM01.0

-------
          difference (RFD)  between the results of the original and duplicate
          analyses  of one sample of each matrix in each SDG.   In order to
          allow direct comparison of the results of both the  analyses,  the
          concentration results from the original and duplicate analyses are
          reported  on a single copy of Form III PCDD-2.

          Complete  the header information as described in Fart A above,  but
          enter the EPA sample number,  lab sample ID,  and lab file ID of the
          duplicate aliquot in these fields on Form III PCDD-2.   Enter the
          concentration units.

          For each  target analyte,  enter the results from both the analyses
          under the columns "Sample Concentration"  and "Duplicate
          Concentration."  These values must match  those on Form I for these
          aliquots,  except  that undetected analytes (flagged  "U"  on Form I)
          are reported as zero on Form III PCDD-2.   If either or both the
          analyses  resulted in an EMPC for any analyte,  enter the EMPC as the
          concentration,  and use that value in the  calculations.

          Calculate the relative percent difference between the two
          concentrations  or EMPCs,  as described in  Exhibit D,  using zero for
          undetected analytes,  and report this value to the nearest whole
          percentage point  under "RPD."  If the analyte was not detected in
          either aliquot, enter zero for both concentrations,  and report the
          RPD as zero as  well.   Flag all values outside the quality control
          limits listed on  the forms by entering an asterisk  (*)  under the
          number (#)  symbol.

     PCDD/PCDF  Method Blank Summary (Form IV)

     This form  summarizes the samples associated with each method blank
     analysis.   A copy of Form IV is required for each blank.

     Complete the header information as described in Part A.   The EPA sample
     number entered in the  box at the top of the form shall be the number
     assigned to the method blank.  The matrix entered on this form refers to
     the matrix of  the associated samples, as one blank is required each time
     that samples of a similar matrix are extracted together.   Therefore,
     samples of differing matrices cannot be mixed together on a single Form
     IV.

     Summarize  the  samples  associated with a given method blank in the box in
     the lower  portion of the form, entering the EPA sample number, lab
     sample ID, lab file ID, and date of analysis of each sample.  Include
     spiked samples and duplicate samples as well.
F.   PCDD/PCDF Window Defining VU* Summary.  Chromatographic Resolution
     Summary,  and Analytical Sequence (Form V)

     1.    PCDD/PCDF Window Defining Mix  Summary  (Form V  PCDD-1)

          This page of Form V is  used to report  the  results of the  analysis
          of the  window defining  mixture that precedes each initial
                                   B-25                              DFLM01.0

-------
     calibration on each GC column and instrument used for analysis.
     The analysis of this mixture is used to document the retention time
     window for the PCDD/PCDF homologue.

     Complete the header information as descr-^M :n Part A,  entering
     the EPA sample number of the window  -opining mixture injection in
     the box at the top of the form.  The header information must
     correspond to the analysis of the window defining mixture.

     In the box in the lower portion of the form, enter the absolute
     retention times of the first and last eluting isomers in each
     homologue.  Enter the retention times in minutes and decimal
     minutes, not minutes and seconds,  nor seconds.

     NOTE:    As there is only one possible octachlorinated dioxin and
             furan, the retention times of these analytes are not
             contained in the window defining mixture, and are not
             reported here.

2.   PCDD/PCDF Chromatographic Resolution Summary (Form V PCDD-2)

     This page of Form V is used to report the Chromatographic
     resolution of selected analytes in one of two solutions,  depending
     on the GC column.   The Chromatographic resolution of these analytes
     is crucial to evaluating the results for the PCDDs/PCDFs reported
     in the samples.  This evaluation is  made every 12 hours during
     which samples or standards are analyzed.

     For the DB-5 (or equivalent) column, the Chromatographic resolution
     is judged from the analysis of the CC3 standard during initial or
     continuing calibration.  For the SP-2331 (or equivalent) column,
     the Chromatographic resolution is judged from the analysis of the
     column performance solution that precedes the analysis of the CC3
     standard on this column (see Exhibit D).

     Complete one copy of Form V PCDD-2 for each GC column used for
     analysis.  Complete the header information as described in Part A,
     entering the EPA sample number of the CC3 standard or the column
     performance solution in the box at the top of the form.  Enter the
     date and time of analysis of the standard in the header.

     Calculate the Chromatographic resolution for the GC column
     identified in the header according to the procedures in Exhibit D.
     For the DB-5 (or equivalent) column, enter only the results from
     the CCS analysis.  For the SP-2331 (or equivalent) column, enter
     only the results from the column performance solution analysis.

     The GC column chosen for the confirmation analysis must meet the
     resolution criteria for the other specified column.  If the
     Contractor chooses a single column for analysis that is designed
     such that a second column confirmation analysis is not required,
     then the Contractor must demonstrate that the resolution criteria
     for both of the specified columns have been met (see Exhibit D).
                               B-26                              DFLM01.0

-------
     3.   PCDD/PCDF Analytical Sequence (Form V PCDD-3)

          This  page of Form V is used Co report the sequence of analyses,
          including the analysis of the window defining  mixture,  the
          calibration ^andards, blanks,  samples,  duplicates,  and spiked
          sample-.   One copy of Form V PCDD 2 is required for each 12-hour
          period during which samples,  blanks,  standards,  etc.  associated
          with  the  SDG are analyzed.

          Complete  the header information as described in Part  A.   Enter the
          inclusive dates and times of the analyses of the first  and last
          initial calibration standards in the fields  for "Init.  Calib.
          Date(s)"  and "Init.  Calib.  Times."  Dates must be in  the format
          MM/DD/YY,  and all times are expressed as HHMM,  in military time
          (i.e.,  a  24-hour clock).

          In the box in the lower portion of the form, enter the  EPA sample
          number, lab sample ID, lab  file ID,  and date and time of analysis
          of all standards,  samples,  blanks,  duplicates,  spiked samples,
          dilutions,  reanalyses, etc.   All analyses in the 12-hour period
          must  be listed on Form V.   If analysis is not  associated with  the .
          SDG being reported,  enter the EPA sample number as "ZZZZZ," as
          described in Part A.   The 12-hour sequence must end with the
       . -  analysis  of the appropriate calibration standard,  as  described in
          Exhibit D.   In order to meet  the requirements  of the  12-hour
          sequence,  the standard must be  injected within 12 hours  of the
          injection of the standard that  began the sequence (CCS  on the  DB-5,
          and the column performance  solution on the SP-2331).

          If the analytical sequence  includes the analysis of the  initial
          calibration standards, these  standards and the window defining mix
          must  be included on that copy of Form V,  identified by  the EPA
          sample numbers described in Part A.   A copy  of  the analytical
          sequence  that includes these  initial calibration standards and  the
          window defining mix must be submitted with each data  package to
          which the  initial calibration applies,  but the  Case number and SAS
          number must match those of  each data package in which these initial
          calibration data are reported.

G.   PCDD/PCDF  Initial Calibration Data Summary (Form  VI}

     1.   PCDD/PCDF Initial Calibration Response Factor  Summary (Form VI
          PCDD-1)

          This  form is used to summarize  the response  factors for each target
          analyte,  internal standard  and cleanup standard calculated from the
          initial calibration.   Complete  the header information as described
          in Part A.   Enter the inclusive initial calibration date(s) and
          times,  as  described for Form V  PCDD-2.   One  copy of Form VI PCDD-1
          must  be completed for each  initial calibration,  for each instrument
          and GC column used for analysis of samples,  and must  be  accompanied
          by a  corresponding Form VI  PCDD-2.
                                   B-27                              DFLM01.0

-------
         Enter the relative response factors (RRF) determined from the
         analysis of each of the calibration standards (CC1 through CC5).
         Enter RRF values to three decimal places.  Calculate the mean RRF,
         as described in Exhibit D, and enter in the column "MEAN RRF."
         Calculate the relative standard deviation as a percentage of the
         mean (%RSD), and enter under "%RSD."  Note that seven of the native
         analytes and the cleanup standard occur only in the CC3 standard,
         and therefore, %RSD calculations are not possible and are not
         reported on this form.  However, for these analytes, enter the
         single point RRF as the "MEAN RRF."  Also note that as the recovery
         standards are used to determine the RRFs of the internal standards,
         no RRF values can be calculated for the recovery standards, and .
         therefore, they do not appear on Form VI PCDD-1.

         All initial calibrations must meet the quality control limits for
         %RSD listed on the form.

    2.   PCDD/PCDF Initial Calibration Ion Abundance Ratio Summary (Form VI
         PCDD-2)

         This page of Form VI is used to report the ion abundance ratios for
         each of the initial calibration standards.  Because the ratio of
         the abundances of the two ions monitored for each analyte is
         crucial to the identification of these analytes, the ion abundance
         ratios must meet the quality control limits.

         For each native analyte, internal standard and recovery standard,
         the two ions monitored for each analyte are listed in the column
         labeled "Selected Ions."  Calculate the ratio of the abundances of
         these two ions according to the procedures in Exhibit D, and enter
         the ion abundance ratio of each analyte in each of the initial
         calibration standards to two decimal places.

         Compare the ion abundance ratios to the quality control limits
         shown on the form, and flag any analyte which did not meet these
         limits in one or more of the standards.

         Note that the cleanup standard does not appear on Form VI PCDD-2,
         as only one ion is monitored for this analyte, and therefore, no
         ion abundance ratio can be calculated.

         One copy of Form VI PCDD-2 must be completed for each initial
         calibration,  for each instrument and GC column  used for analysis  of
         samples, and must accompany a corresponding copy of Form VI PCDD-1.

H.   PCDD/PCDF Continuing Calibration Data  Summary

     1.  PCDD/PCDF Continuing  Calibration Summary  (Form  VII  PCDD-1)

         This  page of  Form VII is used to summarize the  results  of  the
         continuing  calibration  that must occur  in each  12-hour  analytical
         sequence.   The  form is  used to  report the RRF values  and ion
         abundance ratios of each  analyte  in the  CC3 standard, and  to
         compare  these values  to the initial calibration data  reported on

                                   B-28                              DFLM01.0

-------
     Form VI.   One  copy of Form VII  PCDD-1  must  be completed for each
     continuing calibration performed,  and  must  be accompanied by a
     corresponding  copy of Form VII  PCDD-2.

     Complete  the header information as described in Part A.   The date
     and time  ot analysis and lab  fi'e  ID in the header must correspond
     to  the  analysis  of the CC3 standard.   Enter the date of the
     associated initial calibration  in  the  field for "Init.  Calib.
     Date(s):"   If  the calendar date changed during the initial
     calibration, enter the inclusive dates of the first and last
     standards  in the associated initial calibration in the  fields  for
     "Init.  Calib.  Date(s)."

     For each  of the  native analytes, internal standards,  and the
     cleanup standard,  enter the relative response factor (RRF)
     determined from  the analysis  of the continuing calibration standard
     in  the  column  labeled "RRF."  Enter the mean RRF for each analyte
     from the  associated initial calibration,  in the column  labeled
     "MEAN RRF." For the seven native  analytes  and the cleanup standard
     that undergo only a single-point calibration,  enter the CCS RRF
     from the  initial calibration, which is also entered as  the mean RRF
     on  Form VI. The values reported in this column must match those
     reported  on the  Form VI for the associated  initial calibration.
     Calculate the  percent difference (%D)  between the RRF and the  mean
     RRF for each analyte, and report under "%D."  If the percent
     difference exceeds the quality  control limits shown on  the form
     (±30%), flag that analyte by  placing an asterisk (*)  in the "RRF
     FLAG" column.  Report the ion abundance ratio of each analyte  under
     the "ION  RATIO"  column.  Flag any  ion  ratio that fails  outside the
     quality control  limits shown  on the form by placing as  asterisk (*)
     in  the  "ION FLAG" column.

     Note that because only one ion  is  monitored for the cleanup
     standard,  no ion ratio is determined for this analyte.   For the
     recovery  standards, relative  response  factors are not calculated or
     reported  on Form VII, but the ion  abundance ratios for  these
     standards must be reported on Form VII.

2.   PCDD/PCDF Continuing Calibration Summary (Form VII PCDD-2)

     This page of Form VII is used to summarize  the absolute and
     relative  retention times of the analytes in the continuing
     calibration standard that must  be  analyzed  in each 12-hour
     analytical sequence.  Absolute  retention times and relative
     retention times  are critical  to the identification of PCDDs/PCDFs
     by  this method.   One copy of  Form  VII  PCDD-2 must be completed for
     each continuing  calibration performed  and must be accompanied by a
     corresponding  copy of Form VII  PCDD-1.

     Complete  the header information as described in Part A.  The date
     and time  of analysis and lab  file  ID in the header must correspond
     to  the  analysis  of the CCS standard.  Enter the date of the
     associated initial calibration  in  the  field for "Init.  Calib.
     Date(s):"  If  the calendar date changed during the initial

                              B-29                              DFLM01.0

-------
          calibration,  enter the  inclusive  dates  of  the  analyses  of the first
          and last standards in the  associated initial calibration in the
          fields  for  "Init.  Calib. Date(s)."

          For each of the native  analytes and the cleanup  standard,  enter  the
          relative retention time (RRT)  and absolute retention time (RT) of
          the analyte in the calibration standard.   RRT  is calculated
          according to the procedures  in Exhibit  D,  as the RT  of  the native
          analyte divided by the  RT  of appropriate internal standard.   For
          the internal standards  and recovery standards, report the only the
          absolute retention times.  Enter  all RTs in minutes  and decimal
          minutes.  RRTs are reported  to two  decimal places.

I.    Sample Log-In Sheet (Form DC-1)

     This form is used to document the receipt and inspection of  sample
     containers and samples.  One original  of Form DC-1  is required for each
     sample shipping container.  If the  samples in a single sample shipping
     container must be assigned to more  than  one  SDG, the  original Form DC-1
     shall be placed with the deliverables  for the SDG of  the lowest Arabic
     number, and a copy of Form DC-1 must be  placed  with the deliverables  for
     the other SDG(s).  The copies should be  identified as "copy(ies)," and
     the location of the original should be noted on the copies.

     Sign and date the airbill (if present).   Examine the  shipping container
     and record the presence/absence of  custody seals and  their condition
     (e.g., intact, broken)  in item 1  of Form DC-1.   Record the custody seal
     numbers in item 2.

     Open the container, remove the enclosed  sample  documentation, and record
     the presence/absence of chain-of-custody record(s), SMO forms (e.g.,
     Traffic Reports, Packing Lists),  and  airbills or airbill stickers in
     items 3-5.  Specify if there is an airbill present or an airbill sticker
     in item 5.  Record the airbill or sticker number in item 6.

     Remove the samples from the shipping container(s),  examine the samples
     and the sample tags  (if present), and record the condition of the sample
     bottles (e.g., intact, broken, leaking)  and presence  of absence of
     sample tags in items 7 and 8.

     Review the sample shipping documents  and complete the header information
     described in  Instruction A.  Compare the information recorded on all  the
     documents and samples  and circle the appropriate answer in item 9.

     If there are  no problems observed during receipt, sign and date (include
     time) Form DC-1,  the chain-of-custody record, and Traffic Report, and
     write the sample  numbers on Form DC-1.  Record  the appropriate sample
     tags and assigned laboratory numbers  if applicable.  The log-in date
     should be recorded at  the top  of Form DC-1  and  the date and  time of
     cooler  receipt  at the  laboratory should be  recorded  in items 10 and  11.
     Record  the  fraction designation  (if appropriate) and the specific area
     designation (e.g.,  refrigerator  number)  in  the  Sample Transfer block
     located in  the bottom  left  corner  of  Form DC-1.  Sign and date  the
     Sample  Transfer block.  Cross  out  unused  columns and spaces.

                                    B-30                             DFLM01.0

-------
     If there are problems observed during receipt or an answer marked with
     an asterisk (e.g., "absent*") was circled, contact SMO and document the
     contact as well as resolution of the problem on a CLP Communication Log.
     Following resolution, sign and date the forms as specified in the
     preceding paragraph and note, where appropriate, t^e resolution of the
     problem.

J.   CSF Inventory Sheet (Form DC-2)

     This form is used to record the inventory of the CSF purge documents and
     count of documents in the original Sample Data Package that is sent to
     the Region.

     Organize all EPA-CSF documents as described in Section II and Section
     III.  Assemble the documents in the order specified on Form DC-2 and
     Section II and III, and stamp each page with a consecutive number.   (Do
     not number the DC-2 form.)  Inventory the CSF by reviewing the document
     numbers and recording page number ranges in the columns provided in the
     Form DC-2.  If there are no documents for a specific document type,
     enter "NA" in the empty space.

     Certain laboratory-specific documents related to the CSF may not fit
     into a clearly defined category.   The laboratory should review Form DC-2
     to determine if it is most appropriate to place them under item 5,  6,  7,
     or 8.  Item 10 should be used if there is no appropriate previous item.
     These types of documents should be described or listed in the blanks
     under each appropriate item.
                                   B-31                              DFLM01.0

-------
     SECTION IV




DATA REPORTING FORMS
      B-32                              DFLM01.0

-------
Lab Name:

Lab Code:

Matrix:
                            1DFA
                PCDD/PCDF SAMPLE DATA SUMMARY
                                     Contract:

                                      SAS No.:
                                                              EPA SAMPLE NO.
Case No.:
SDG No.:
         	 (Soil/Water/Waste/Ash)

Sample wt/vol:      	(g/mL)	

Water Sample Prep.:   	 (Sepf/Cont)

Concentrated Extract Volume: 	 (uL)
Injection Volume:

GC Column:
                      (uL)  % Solids: _

                         ID: _ (mm)
                          Lab Sample ID:

                          Lab File ID:

                          Date Received:

                          Date Extracted:

                          Date Analyzed:
                          Dilution Factor:
  ANALYTE
                           CONCENTRATION UNITS:  (ng/L or ug/Kg)


                                                            Q
SELECTED  PEAK   ION
  IONS     RT   RATIO # CONCENTRATION
          EMPC/EDL
2378-TCDD
2378 -TCDF
12378-PeCDF
12378-PeCDD
23478-PeCDF
123478-HXCDF
123678-HxCDF
123478-HXCDD
123678-HXCDD
123789-HxCDD
234678-HXCDF
123789-HxCDF
1234678-HpCDF
1234678-HpCDD
1234789-HpCDF
OCDD
OCDF

320/322
304/306
340/342
356/358
340/342
374/376
374/376
390/392
390/392
390/392
374/376
374/376
408/410
424/426
408/410
458/460
442/444



























































































NOTE:  Concentrations, EMPCs, and EDLs are calculated on a wet weight basis.
  INTERNAL
  STANDARD
                    SELECTED  PEAK   ION    ION RATIO   %    RECOVERY
                      IONS     RT   RATIO #  LIMITS    REC #  LIMITS
13C-2378-TCDF
13C-2378-TCDD
13C-123678-HXCDD
13C-1234678-HpCDF
13C-OCDD
37C1-2378-TCDD

316/318
332/334
402/404
420/422
470/472
328/NA













NA

0.65-0.89
0.65-0.89
1.05-1.43
0.88-1.20
0.76-1.01
NA








25-150
25-150
25-150
25-150
25-150
25-150

#  Column to be used to flag values outside QC limits

                           FORM I pcnn-i


-------
                            1DFB
            PCDD/PCDF TOXICITY EQUIVALENCE SUMMARY
                                                             EPA SAMPLE  NO.
Lab Name:

Lab Code:

Matrix:
                    Case No.:
Contract:_

 SAS No.:
SDG No.:
         	 (Soil/Water/Waste/Ash)

Sample wt/vol:      	(g/mL)	

Water Sample Prep.:   	 (Sepf/Cont)

Concentrated Extract Volume:  	 (uL)
Injection Volume:

GC Column:
                      (uL)   % Solids: _

                      	 ID: 	(mm)
         Lab Sample ID:

         Lab File ID:

         Date Received:

         Date Extracted:

         Date Analyzed:
         Dilution Factor:
          ANALYTE
                           CONCENTRATION UNITS: (ng/L or ug/Kg)


                            CONCENTRATION    TEF
                   TEF-ADJUSTED
                  CONCENTRATION
2378-TCDD
2378-TCDF
12378-PeCDF
12378-PeCDD
23478-PeCDF
123478-HxCDF
123678-HXCDF
123478-HxCDD
123678-HxCDD
123789-HXCDD
234678-HXCDF
123789-HxCDF
1234678-HpCDF
1234678-HpCDD
1234789-HpCDF
OCDD
OCDF





















X 1.0
X 0.1
X 0.05 =
X 0.5
X 0.5
X 0.1
X 0.1
X 0.1 =
X 0.1
X 0.1
X 0.1
X 0.1
x 0.01 =
X 0.01 =
X 0.01 =
X 0.001 =
X 0.001 =
Total =
















-



NOTE:  Do not include EMPC or EDL values in the TEF-adjusted Concentration.

If the Total Toxic Equivalent Concentration of the sample is greater than
7 ng/L for an aqueous sample, greater than 0.7 ug/Kg for any solid matrix,
or greater than 7 ug/Kg for a chemical waste sample, then second column
confirmation of the results may be required.
                           FORM I PCDD-2
                                                                         10/90

-------
                             1DFC
         PCDD/PCDF SECOND  COLUMN CONFIRMATION SUMMARY
                                                              EPA SAMPLE NO.
Lab Name:

Lab Code:

Matrix:
                    Case No.:
                 Contract:

                  SAS No.:
                (Soil/Water/Waste/Ash)

Sample wt/vol:      	(g/mL)	

Water Sample Prep.:   	 (Sepf/Cont)

                                  (uL)
Concentrated Extract Volume:

Injection Volume: 	  (uL)  % Solids:

GC Column:
                          Lab Sample ID:

                          Lab File ID:

                          Date Received:

                          Date Extracted:

                          Date Analyzed:
                         ID:
               (mm)
Dilution Factor:
  ANALYTE
                           CONCENTRATION UNITS: (ng/L or ug/Kg)


                                                            Q
SELECTED  PEAK   ION
  IONS     RT   RATIO # CONCENTRATION
          SDG No.:
                    EMPC/EDL
2378-TCDD
2378-TCDF
12378-PeCDF
12378-PeCDD
23478-PeCDF
123478-HxCDF
123678-HxCDF
123478-HXCDD
123678-HXCDD
1 O *3 *7 Q Q II v/Tlf^
J.<£ J /oy~rlXv-lJlJ
O "5 A £*7 Q TTv/"tTMr
£ J4o / o~n.XL.Ur
123789-HxCDF
1234678-HpCDF
1234678-HpCDD
1234789-HpCDF
OCDD
OCDF
•
320/322
304/306
340/342
356/358
340/342
374/376
374/376
390/392
390/392
i on / 1 QO
jy u/ jyz
0*7 >l / fj C.
J /4/ O /O
374/376
408/410
424/426
408/410
458/460
442/444





































































































NOTE:  Concentrations, EMPCs, and EDLs are calculated on a wet  weight  basis.
  INTERNAL
  STANDARD
                    SELECTED  PEAK   ION    ION RATIO
                      IONS     RT   RATIO #  LIMITS
                                    %    RECOVERY
                                   REG #  LIMITS
13C-2378-TCDF
13C-2378-TCDD
13C-123678-HXCDD
13C-1234678-HpCDF
13C-OCDD

37C1-2378-TCDD
•-
316/318
332/334
402/404
420/422
470/472

328/NA















NA

0.65-0.89
0.65-0.89
1.05-1.43
0.88-1.20
07e_i ni

NA









25-150
25-150
25-150
25-150
o c T c n

25-150

#  Column to be used to flag values outside QC limits

                           FORM I PCDD-3
                                                                         i n

-------
                            2DF
      PCDD/PCDF TOTAL HOMOLOGUE CONCENTRATION SUMMARY
                                                              EPA SAMPLE NO.
Lab Name:

Lab Code:

Matrix:
                    Case No.:
Contract:

 SAS No.:
SDG No.:
         	  (Soil/Water/Waste/Ash)

Sample wt/vol:      	(g/mL)	

Water Sample Prep.:   	  (Sepf/Cont)

Concentrated Extract Volume: 	  (uL)
Injection Volume:

GC Column:
                       (uL)  % Solids: _

                         ID: 	(mm)
         Lab Sample ID: _

         Lab File ID:   _

         Date Received: _

         Date Extracted:_

         Date Analyzed: _

         Dilution Factor:
                           CONCENTRATION UNITS:  (ng/L or ug/Kg)
          HOMOLOGUE
                          PEAKS CONCENTRATION
                 EMPC/EDL
DIOXINS
Total TCDD
Total PeCDD
Total HXCDD
Total HpCDD
FURANS
Total TCDF
Total PeCDF
Total HxCDF
Total HpCDF





































NOTE:  Concentrations,  EMPCs,  and  EDLs are calculated on a wet weight basis.
       The total  congener  concentrations do not affect the TEF calculations.
                            FORM II PCDD
                                                                         10/90

-------
Lab Name:

Lab Code:

Matrix:
                            3DFA
                PCDD/PCDF SPIKED SAMPLE SUMMARY
                      Contract:

                       SAS No.:
                                              EPA SAMPLE NO.
Case No.:
SDG No.:
(Soil/Water/Waste/Ash)
     ANALYTE
            CONCENTRATION UNITS:  (ng/L or ug/Kg)   	

        SPIKE    SPIKED
        ADDED    SAMPLE        SAMPLE       %       QC
         (PG) CONCENTRATION CONCENTRATION  REC #  LIMITS
2378-TCDD
2378-TCDF
12378-PeCDF
12378-PeCDD
123678-HXCDF
123678-HXCDD
1234678-HpCDF
1234678-HpCDD
OCDD
OCDF







	




































50-150
50-150
50-150
50-150
50.-150
50-150
50-150
50-150
50-150
50-150
   If an analyte is not detected in the unspiked sample, enter 0  (zero) as the
   "SAMPLE CONCENTRATION."

   # Column to be used to flag values outside QC limits.

   QC limits are advisory.
                            FORM III  PCDD-1
                                                         10/90

-------
                            3DFB
              PCDD/PCDF DUPLICATE SAMPLE SUMMARY
Matrix: 	  (Soil/Water/Waste/Ash)
                                      EPA SAMPLE NO,
Lab Name:
Lab Code:
Contract :

Case No.: SAS No.: SDG No.:
                           CONCENTRATION UNITS: (ng/L or ug/Kg)
     ANALYTE
   SAMPLE       DUPLICATE            QC
CONCENTRATION CONCENTRATION  RPD # LIMITS
2378-TCDD
2378-TCDF
12378-PeCDF
12378-PeCDD
23478-PeCDF
123478-HXCDF
123678-HXCDF
123478-HXCDD
123678-HxCDD
123789-HXCDD
234678-HXCDF
123789-HXCDF
1234678-HpCDF
1234678-HpCDD
1234789-HpCDF
OCDD
OCDF























































50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
   If an analyte is not detected in either analysis, enter 0  (zero) as
   the concentration.

   # Column to be used to flag values outside QC limits.

   QC limits are advisory
                            FORM III  PCDD-2
                                                  10/90

-------
Lab Name:

Lab Code:

Matrix:
                             4DF
                PCDD/PCDF METHOD BLANK SUMMARY


                                	   Contract:_

                                      SAS No.:
                                                             EPA  SAMPLE NO.
Case No.:
  SDG No.:
         	 (Soil/Water/Waste/Ash)

Sample wt/vol:      	(g/mL)	

Water Sample Prep.:   	 (Sepf/Cont)
                         Lab Sample ID: _

                          Lab File ID:

                          Date Extracted:

                          Date Analyzed:
THIS METHOD BLANK APPLIES TO THE FOLLOWING SAMPLES, SPIKES, AND DUPLICATES:
              EPA
           SAMPLE NO.
                            LAB
                         SAMPLE ID
                       LAB
                     FILE ID
  DATE
ANALYZED
                           FORM IV PCDD
                                                                         10/90

-------
                            5DFA
              PCDD/PCDF WINDOW DEFINING MIX  SUMMARY
                                          EPA SAMPLE NO.
Lab Name:_

Lab Code:

GC Column:
Instrument ID:
Case No.:

     ID:
  Contract:

   SAS No.:
          SDG No.:
(nan)
    wile ID:  .

Date Analyzed:

Time Analyzed:
                                RT       RT
                               FIRST    LAST
                    CONGENER  ELUTING  ELUTING
TCDD
TCDF
PeCDD
PeCDF
HxCDD
HxCDF
HpCDD
HpCDF



















                           FORM V  PCDD-1
                                                     10/90

-------
                             5DFB                             EPA SAMPLE NO.
       PCDD/PCDF CHROMATOGRAPHIC RESOLUTION SUMMARY
Lab Name:                            Contract:
Lab Code: 	  Case No.: 	  SAS No.: 	  SDG No.:

oc Column:	ID: 	(mm)       Lab File ID:   	

Instrument ID: 	                     Date Analyzed: 	

                                              Time Analyzed: 	
Percent Valley determination for DB-5  (or equivalent) column -
For the CC3 standard beginning the 12-hour period:

13C-2378-TCDD/13C-1234-TCDD:  	

123478-HXCDD/123678-HXCDD:    	

QC LIMITS:

Percent Valley between.the TCDD isomers must be less than or equal to 25%

Percent Valley between the HxCDD isomers must be less than or equal to 50%


Percent Valley Determination for SP-2331 (or equivalent) Column -
For the Column Performance Solution beginning the 12-hour period:

1478-TCDD/2378-TCDD:        	

2378-TCDD/(1237/1238)-TCDD: 	

QC LIMITS:

Percent Valley between the TCDD isomers must be less than or equal to 25%.
                          FORM V PCDD-2                                 10/90

-------
                            5DFC
              PCDD/PCDF ANALYTICAL SEQUENCE SUMMARY
Lab Name:_

Lab Code:

GC Column:
Case No.:

     ID:
Contract:

 SAS No.:
SDG No.
                                    (nun)
          Instrument ID:
Init. Calib. Date(s):

Init. Calib. Times:
  THE ANALYTICAL SEQUENCE OF STANDARDS, SAMPLES, BLANKS, SPIKES, AND
                     DUPLICATES IS AS FOLLOWS:
EPA
SAMPLE NO.























LAB
SAMPLE ID























LAB
FILE ID























DATE
ANALYZED























TIME
ANALYZED























                           FORM  V  PCDD-3
                                                                         10/9C

-------
                            6DFA
        PCDD/PCDF INITIAL CALIBRATION RESPONSE FACTOR SUMMARY
Lab Name:_

Lab Code:

GC Column:
Case No.:

     ID:
Init. Calib. Date(s):

Init. Calib. Times:
  Contract:

   SAS No.:
         SDG No.:
(mm)
Instrument ID:
NATIVE ANALYTES
VS. INTERNAL STDS.
2378-TCDD
. 2378-TCDF
12378-PeCDF
12378-PeCDD
23478-PeCDF
123478-HXCDF
123678-HxCDF
123478-HxCDD
123678-HxCDD
123789-HXCDD
234678-HxCDF
123789-HxCDF
1234678-HpCDF
1234678-HpCDD
1234789-HpCDF
OCDD
OCDF
INTERNAL STANDARDS
VS. RECOVERY STDS.
13C-2378-TCDD
13C-2378-TCDF
13C-123678-HXCDD
13C-1234678-HpCDF
13C-OCDD
37C1-2378-TCDD


CC1

























CC2
























RRF (N)
CC3

























CC4

























CCS
























MEAN
RRF

























%RSD
























A single point calibration is performed for seven of the native analytes and
the cleanup standard.  Therefore, no %RSD is reported for these compounds.

QC Limits:  %RSD must be less than or equal to 15.0%.
                          FORM VI PCDD-1
                                                    10/90

-------
                            6DFB
        PCDD/PCDF INITIAL CALIBRATION ION ABUNDANCE RATIO SUMMARY
Lab Name:_

Lab Code:

GC Column:
Case No.:

     ID:
Init. Calib. Date(s):

Init. Calib. Times:
  Contract:

   SAS No.:
                                    SDG No.:
(mm)
Instrument ID:
NATIVE ANALYTES
2378-TCDD
' 2378-TCDF
12378-PeCDF
12378-PeCDD
23478-PeCDF
123478-HxCDF
123678-HXCDF
123478-HXCDD
123678-HxCDD
123789-HXCDD
234678-HxCDF
123789-HxCDF
1234678-HpCDF
1234678-HpCDD
1234789-HpCDF
OCDD
OCDF
INTERNAL STANDARDS
13C-2378-TCDD
13C-2378-TCDF
13C-123678-HXCDD
13C-1234678-HpCDF
13C-OCDD
RECOVERY STANDARDS
13C-1234-TCDD
13C-123789-HXCDD

SELECTED
IONS
320/322
304/306
340/342
356/358
340/342
374/376
374/376
390/392
390/392
390/392
374/376
374/376
408/410
424/426
408/410
458/460
442/444
332/334
316/318
402/404
420/422
470/472
332/334
402/404
ION ABUNDANCE RATIO
CC1

















CC2

















CC3
























CC4

















CCS


















FLAG

























QC
LIMITS
0.65-0.89
0.65-0.89
1.24-1.86
1.24-1.86
1.24-1.86
1.05-1.43
1.05-1.43
1.05-1.43
1.05-1.43
1.05-1.43
1.05-1.43
1.05-1.43
0.88-1.20
0.88-1.20
0.88-1.20
0.76-1.02
0-7 /r T /i*>
. / D i. • UZ
0.65-0.89
0.65-0.89
1.05-1.43
0.88-1.20
0.76-1.02
0.65-0.89
1.05-1.43
 QC limits  represent + 15%  window around the theoretical ion abundance ratio.

 A single point calibration is performed for seven of the native analytes
 and the cleanup standard.

 The laboratory must flag any analyte in any calibration solution which does
 not meet the ion abundance ratio QC limit by placing an asterisk in the flag
 column.
                           FORM VI PCDD-2
                                                     10/90

-------
                            7DFA
             PCDD/PCDF CONTINUING CALIBRATION SUMMARY
Lab Name:_

Lab Code:

GC Column:
Date Analyzed:

Lab File ID:
Case No.

     ID:
  Contract:

   SAS No.:
         SDG No.
(mm)
Instrument ID:

Time Analyzed:
          Init. Calib. Date(s):
NATIVE ANALYTES
2378-TCDD
2378-TCDF
' 12378-PeCDF
12378-PeCDD
23478-PeCDF
123478-HxCDF
123678-HxCDF
123478-HxCDD
123678-HxCDD .
123789-HxCDD
234678-HXCDF
123789-HxCDF
1234678-HpCDF
1234678-HpCDD
1234789-HpCDF
OCDD
OCDF
INTERNAL STANDARDS
VS. RECOVERY STDS.
13C-2378-TCDD
13C-2378-TCDF
13C-123678-HXCDD
13C-1234678-HpCDF
13C-OCDD
37C1-2378-TCDD
RECOVERY STANDARDS
13C-1234-TCDD
13C-123789-HXCDD

SELECTED
IONS
320/322
304/306
340/342
356/358
340/342
374/376
374/376
390/392
390/392
390/392
374/376
374/376
408/410
424/426
408/410
458/460
442/444
332/334
316/318
402/404
420/422
470/472
328/NA
332/334
402/404

RRF























NA
NA

MEAN
RRF























NA
NA

%D























NA
NA

RRF
FLAG























NA
NA

ION
RATIO






















NA



ION
FLAG






















NA



QC
LIMITS
0.65-0.89
0.65-0.89
1.24-1.86
1.24-1.86
1.24-1.86
1.05-1.43
1.05-1.43
1.05-1.43
1.05-1.43
1.05-1.43
1.05-1.43
1.05-1.43
0.88-1.20
0.88-1.20
0.88-1.20
0.76-1.02
0.76-1.02
0.65-0.89
0.65-0.89
1.05-1.43
0.88-1.20
0.76-1.02
NA
0.65-0.89
1.05-1.43

QC limits shown are for ion abundance ratios.  Maximum %D for RRF is + 30.0%
The laboratory must flag any analyte which does not meet criteria for %D or
ion abundance ratio by placing an asterisk in the appropriate flag column.
                         FORM VII PCDD-l
                                                    10/90

-------
                             7DFB
    PCDD/PCDF  CONTINUING CALIBRATION RETENTION TIME SUMMARY
Lab Name:_

Lab Code:

GC Column:
Date Analyzed:

Lab File ID:
Case No.

     ID:
  Contract:

   SAS No.:
         SDG No.
(mm)
Instrument ID:

Time Analyzed:
          Init. Calib. Date(s):
NATIVE ANALYTES
2378-TCDD
2378-TCDF
12378-PeCDF
12378-PeCDD
23478-PeCDF
123478-HxCDF
123678-HxCDF
123478-HxCDD
123678-HxCDD
123789-HxCDD
234678-HXCDF
123789-HXCDF
1234678-HpCDF
1234678-HpCDD
1234789-HpCDF
OCDD
OCDF
INTERNAL STANDARDS
VS. RECOVERY STDS.
13C-2378-TCDD
13C-2378-TCDF
13C-123678-HXCDD
13C-1234678-HpCDF
13C-OCDD
37C1-2378-TCDD
RECOVERY STANDARDS
13C-1234-TCDD
13C-123789-HXCDD

RRT






	

	
	




NA
NA
NA
NA
NA

NA .
NA

RT






	

	
	













           RRT =  (RT  of  analyte)/(RT of appropriate internal standard)
                          FORM VII  PCDD-2
                                                     10/90

-------
SAMPLE LOG-IN SHEET
Lab Name
Received By (PrruNme)

Paoe of

Log-in Date
Received By (Signaure)
Case Number
Remarks:
1. Custody Seal(s)
Z Custody Seal NOSJ
3. Chain-of-Custody
Records
<. Traffic Reports or Padu
Lists
S Airbffl
a AMdlNo.-
7. Sample Tags
Sample Tag Numbers
a Sample Condition:
9l Does information on
custody records, traffic
reports, and sample tags
agree?
10. Date Received at Lab:
11. Time Received:
Sample
Fraction
Area*
By
On
Sample Delivery Group No. SASNumber
i
PresemMbsem*
kitacVBroken

PresentfAbsent*
xj PresenVAbsent*
AirbilVSlicker
Present/Absent*

PresentfAbsenT
Listed/Not Listed
on Chain-of-Custody
IntactfSrokenVLeaking
YesMo*




Transfer
Fraction
Area*
By
On
EPA
'Sample*


















Corresponding
Sample
Tag*


















Assigned
Lab*


















Remarks:
Condition of Sample Shipment, etc.


















* Contact SMO and anach record of resolution. 	 ~~1
Received By
Dale
Logbook No.
Logbook Page No.
      FORM DC-1
10/90

-------
                            PCDD/PCDF COMPLETE SDG FILE  (CSF)  INVENTORY SHEET
   LABORATORY NAME 	 CITY/STATE
   CASE NO. 	 SOG NO. 	 SDG NOS. TO FOLLOW	SAS MO.


   CONTRACT NO.                                            <•••••_ 	'.. .	
     All  documents delivered  in the  complete SDG  file must be  original documents
     where possible.   (REFERENCE EXHIBIT B, SECTION II  and  SECTION III.)
                                                                  PACE NOs        CHECK
                                                                 FROM   TO     LAB      EPA
1.   Inventory Sheet (Form DC-2)  (Do not number)
2.   SDG Narrative
3..   Traffic Report
4.   PCDD/PCDF Data
     a.  Sample Data
          TCL Results (Form I PCDD-1)
          Calculation of the Toxicity Equivalence
             (Form I PCDD-2)
          Second Column Confirmation Summary (Form I PCDD-3)
          Selected Ion Current Profile (SICP) for each
             sample and each analysis of each sample
          Total Congener Concentration Results (Form II PCDD)
     b.  Quality Control Data
          Spiked Sample Results (Form III PCDD-1)
          Duplicate Sample Results (Form III PCDD-2)
          Method Blank Summary (Form IV PCDD)
          Window Defining Mix Summary (Form V PCDD-1)
          Chromatographic Resolution Summary (Form V PCDD-2)
          SICP for each QC analysis
     c.  Calibration Data
          Initial Calibration Data (Form VI PCDD-1 and
             Form VI PCDD-2) and  PCDD/PCDF standard(s)  SICPs
             for the initial (five-point) calibration
          Continuing Calibration  Data (Form VII  PCDD-1  and
             Form VII PCDD-2) and PCDD/PCDF standard(s)  SICPs
             for all continuing calibrations
     d.  Raw Quality Control Data
          Blank Data and SICPs for each blank analyzed
          Spiked Sample Data and  SICPs for each
            spiked  sample analyzed
                                              FORM DC-2-1                                   10/90

-------
                    PCDD/PCDF COMPLETE SDG FILE (CSF)  INVENTORY SHEET (Cont.)
   CASE HO.
                   SDK NO.
                                 SOG NOS. TO FOLLOU
                                                                        SAS NO.
                                                                  PAGE NOs
                                                                 FROM   TO
   CHECK
LAB     EPA
5.   Miscellaneous Data

      Original preparation and analysis  forms  or copies  of
        preparation and analysis  logbook pages
      Internal sample and sample  extract transfer
        chain-of-custody records
      Screening records
      All instrument output, including strip charts
        from screening activities (describe or list)
6.   EPA Shiopine/Receivine Documents

      Airbills (No. of shipments 	)
      Chain-of-Custody Records
      Sample Tags
      Sample Log-In Sheet (Lab & DC1)
      SDG Cover Sheet
      Miscellaneous Shipping/Receiving Records
        (describe or list)
7.   Internal Lab Sample Transfer Records and Tracking Sheets
    (describe or list)
8.   Other Records (describe or list)

      Telephone Communication Log
                                             FORM  DC-2-2
                                                                                          10/90

-------
                    PCDD/PCDF COMPLETE SDG FILE  (CSF)  INVENTORY SHEET  (Cont.)
   CASE NO.
                   SDG NO.
                                  SDG NOS. TO FOLLOW
                                                                         SAS NO.
9.    Comments:
Completed by:
  (CLP Lab)
(Signature)
(Printed Name/Title)
(Date)
Audited by:
  (EPA)
(Signature)
(Printed Name/Title)
(Date)

-------
                                  EXHIBIT C
                        TARGET COMPOUND LIST (TCL)  AND
                 CONTRACT REQUIRED QUANTITATION LIMITS (CRQL)
NOTE:  The values in these tables are quantitation limits.  not absolute
detection limits.  The amount of material necessary to produce a detector
response that can be identified and reliably quantified is greater than that
needed to be simply detected above the background noise.  The quantitation
limits in these tables are set at the concentrations in the sample equivalent
to the concentration of the lowest calibration standard analyzed for each
analyte.

Specific quantitation limits are highly matrix-dependent.  The quantitation
limits listed herein are provided for guidance and may not always be
achievable.

The CRQL values listed on the following pages are based on the analysis of
samples according to the specifications given in Exhibit D.  All CRQL values
are reported on a wet weight basis, as are sample data produced using the
specifications in Exhibit D.
                                                              DFLM01.1 (9/91)

-------
  TARGET COMPOUND LIST (TCL) AND CONTRACT REQUIRED QUANTITATION LIMITS (CRQL)
                                               Quantitation  I imits
PCDD/PCDF
2378 -TCDD
2378-TCDF
12378-PeCDF
12378-PeCDD
23478 -PeCDF
123478 -HxCDF
123678 -HxCDF
123478 -HxCDD
123678-HxCDD
123789 -HxCDD
234678 -HxCDF
123789 -HxCDF
1234678 -HpCDF
1234678 -HpCDD
1234789 -HpCDF
OCDD
OCDF
CAS Number
1746-01-6
51207-31-9
57117-41-6
40321-76-4
57117-31-4
70648-26-9
57117-44-9
39227-28-6
57653-85-7
19408-74-3
60851-34-5
72918-21-9
67562-39-4
35822-46-9
55673-89-7
3268-87-9
39001-02-0
Water
(ng/L)
10
10
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
50
50
Soil
(ug/Kg)
1.0
1.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
5.0
5.0
Fly
Ash
(ug/Kg)
1.0
1.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
5.0
5.0
Chemical
Waste2
(ug/Kg)
10
10
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
50
50
   All CRQL values  listed here are based on the wet weight of the sample.
o
   Chemical waste includes  the matrices of oils, stillbottoms, oily sludge, wet
   fuel  oil,  oil-laced soil, and surface water heavily contaminated with these
   matrices.
                                    C-2
DFLM01.0

-------
 In  addition,  data are reported for  the  total concentration of all detected
 PCDDs  or  PCDFs  in the following horaologues.  However, because the number of
 non-2,3,7,8-substituted isomers that might be detected in a sample is
 unpredictable,  it is  not possible to assign CRQL values to the total homologue
 concentrations.
   Homologue
                  CAS Number
                 Number of
                 Possible
                 Isomers
             Number of
             2,3,7,8-Substituted
             Isomers
   Total
   Total
   Total
   Total
   Total
   Total
   Total
   Total
TCDD
TCDF
PeCDD
PeCDF
HxCDD
HxCDF
HpCDD
HpCDF
41903-57-5
55722-27-5
36088-22-9
30402-15-4
34465-4608
55684-94-1
37871-00-4
38998-75-3
22
38
14
28
10
16
 2
 4
1
1
1
2
3
4
1
2
There is only one isomer in both the OCDD and OCDF homologues,  hence the total
concentration is the same as the 2,3,7,8-substituted concentration listed on
the previous page.
TCDD      -  Tetrachlorinated dibenzo-p-dioxin
TCDF      -  Tetrachlorinated dibenzofuran
PeCDD     -  Pentachlorinated dibenzo-p-dioxin
PeCDF     -  Pentachlorinated dibenzofuran
HxCDD     -  Hexachlorinated dibenzo-p-dioxin
HxCDF     =  Hexachlorinated dibenzofuran
HpCDD     -  Heptachlorinated dibenzo-p-dioxin
HpCDF     =  Heptachlorinated dibenzofuran
OCDD      —  Octachlorinated dibenzo-p-dioxin
OCDF      -  Octachlorinated dibenzofuran
                                     C-3
                                                             DFLM01.0

-------
     EXHIBIT  D
ANALYTICAL METHODS
                                      DFLM01.0

-------
                              Table of Contents


                                                                         Page


1.      Scope and Application	D-4
2.      Summary of Method	D-5
3.      Interferences 	D- 8
4.      Apparatus and Equipment	D-9
5.      Reagents and Consumable Materials 	 D-13
6.      Mass Calibration 	D-16
7.      Retention Time Windows and Calibration
        of Target Analytes 	D-16
8.      Sample Homogenization, Preservation and Handling	D-27
9.      Extraction Procedures 	D-29
9.1.   Chemical Waste Sample Extraction 	 D-29
9.2.   Soxhlet-Dean Stark (SDS) Apparatus 	 D-30
9.3.   Fly Ash Sample Extraction	D-32
9.4.   Soil/Sediment Sample Extraction 	 D-32
9.5.   Water Sample Extraction 	 D-33
9.6.   Macro-Concentration Procedures 	D- 34
9.7.   Extract Cleanup Procedures 	D-37
9.8.   Micro-Concentration of Extracts 	D-38
9.9.   Silica Gel and Alumina Column
        Chromatographic Procedure 	 D-38
9.10.  Carbon Column Chromatographic Procedure 	D-39
9.11.  Final Concentration	D-40
10.    GC/MS Analysis 	D-41
11.    Identification Criteria 	 D-42
12.    Method Blanks 	D-43
13.    Spiked Sample Analysis 	D-44
14.    Duplicate Sample Analysis 	 D-45
15.    Calculations 	D-46
16.    Isomer Specificity 	D-51
17.    Required Sample Reruns 	D-52
                                    D-2                              DFLM01.0

-------
                                LIST OF TABLES


Table 1   Suggested Operating Conditions for a Dfi-5 (or Equivalent)  Column

Table 2   2378-TCDD Toxicity Equivalency Factors (TEFs) for PCDDs/PCDFs

Table 3   Concentration Calibration Solutions

Table 4   Internal Standard, Recovery Standard,  and Cleanup Standard Solutions

Table 5   Ions Specified for Selected Ion Monitoring for PCDDs/PCDFs

Table 6   Criteria for Isotopic Ratio Measurements for PCDDs/PCDFs

Table 7   Recommended Selected Ion Monitoring Descriptors

Table 8   Relationship of Internal Standards to Analytes, and Relationship of
          Recovery Standards to Analytes,  Internal Standard and Cleanup
          Standards

Table 9   PCDD/PCDF Isomers in the Window Defining Mix for a 60 m DB-5 (or
          Equivalent) Column

Table 10  Supplemental Calibration Solution

Table 11  Matrix Spiking Solution

Table 12  Column Performance Solution for a SP-2331 (or Equivalent)  Column

Table 13  Example Analytical Sequences



                                LIST OF  FIGURES


Figure 1  Flow Chart for Sample Extraction and Cleanup for the Analysis of
          PCDDs and PCDFs in Complex Waste Samples

Figure 2  General Structures of PCDDs and PCDFs

Figure 3  Measurement of Signal-To-Noise Ratio

Figure 4  Soxhlet/Dean-Stark Extractor

Figure 5  Valley Between 2378-TCDD and Other Closely Eluting Isomers on a SP-
          2331 (or Equivalent) Column
                                    D-3                              DFLM01.0

-------
1.    Scope and Application

1.1   This method is appropriate for the detection and quantitative
      measurement of 2378-tetrachlorinated dibenzo-p-dioxin (2378-TCDD),
      2378-tetrachlorinated dibenzofuran (2378-TCDF),  and the 2,3,7,8-
      substituted penta-,  hexa-, hepta- and octachlorinated dibenzo-p-dioxins
      (PCDDs) and dibenzofurans (PCDFs) in water,  soil,  fly ash,  and chemical
      waste samples including stillbottom, fuel oil,  and sludge matrices.
      The analytical method requires the use of high resolution gas
      chromatography and low resolution mass spectrometry (HRGC/LRMS) on
      sample extracts that have been subjected to  specified cleanup
      procedures.   The calibration range is dependent on the compound and the
      sample size.  The sample size varies by sample matrix.  The Contract
      Required Quantitation Limits (CRQLs) for each matrix and compound are
      listed in Exhibit C.  The upper limit of the calibration range for each
      compound is 20 times the CRQL.  Samples in which any target compound is
      found above the calibration range must be diluted and reanalyzed.

1.2   The protocol requires the calculation of the 2378-TCDD toxicity
      equivalence according to the procedures given in the U.S. Environmental
      Protection Agency "Update of Toxicity Equivalency Factors (TEFs) for
      Estimating Risks Associated with Exposures to Mixtures of Chlorinated
      Dibenzo-p-Dioxins and Dibenzofurans (CDDs/CDFs)" March 1989 (EPA 625/3-
      89/016).  This procedure recognized that structure-activity
      relationships exist between the chemical structure of a particular
      PCDD/PCDF "and its ability to elicit a biological/toxic response in
      various in vivo and in vitro test systems."   Of the 210 possible
      chlorinated dibenzo-p-dioxins and chlorinated dibenzofurans, the 17
      isomers that bear chlorine atoms in the 2,3,7 and 8 positions of their
      respective structures are the compounds of greatest concern.  To aid in
      the assessment of risks to human health and the environment, a factor
      is assigned to each of these 17 2,3,7,8-substituted PCDDs and PCDFs
      that relates the toxicity of that isomer to  a concentration of the most
      toxic isomer, 2378-TCDD.  These factors are  called TEFs.  The
      concentrations of any of the 17 isomers that are detected in an
      environmental sample can then be adjusted by the TEF and summed,
      yielding a concentration of 2378-TCDD with an equivalent toxicity.

1.3   If the toxicity equivalence is less than 0.7 parts per billion  (ppb)
      for a soil or fly ash sample, less than 7 parts-per-trillion (ppt) for
      an aqueous sample, or less than 7 ppb for a chemical waste, no further
      analysis is required.  If the toxicity equivalence is greater than or
      equal to 0.7 ppb  (soil or fly ash), 7 ppt (aqueous), or 7 ppb  (chemical
      waste), analysis on a column capable of resolving all 2,3,7,8-
      substituted PCDDs/PCDFs is required.

      For any sample analyzed on a DB-5 (or equivalent) column in which
      either 2378-TCDD or 2378-TCDF is reported as an "Estimated Maximum
      Possible Concentration" (see Section 15.7),  regardless of TEF-adjusted
      concentration or matrix, analysis of the extract is required on a
      second GC column which provides better specificity for these two
      isomers.
                                    D-4                              DFLM01.0

-------
1.4   This method is also capable of determining the total concentration of
      all PCDDs/FCDFs in a given level of chlorination (i.e., Total TCDD,
      Total FeCDF, etc.), although complete chromatographic separation of all
      210 possible FCDDs/PCDFs is not possible under the instrumental
      conditions described here.  The "Total" concentrations are not assigned
      TEF values in the February 1989 TEF procedure, and therefore are not
      included in the toxicity equivalence calculations.

1.5   The qualitative identification criteria (see Section 11) include
      requirements for retention times, simultaneous detection of three ions
      per compound, and limits on the ratio of the abundances of the two most
      intense ions produced by each compound.  In instances where a signal is
      detected that meets all of the qualitative identification criteria
      except the ion abundance ratio, the method requires calculation of an
      "Estimated Maximum Possible Concentration" (EMPC).  The presence of
      interferences that coelute with the compounds of interest may cause the
      ion abundance ratio to fall outside the limits for qualitative
      identification and would also affect the quantitative results.  The
      EMPC is a worst case estimate of the sample concentration that the
      signal would represent if it did meet all the identification criteria
      (see Section 15.7).  Because of the quantitative uncertainty associated
      with the EMPC values, they are not included in the TEF calculations
      performed in the method.

1.6   The data that result from these analyses are reported based on the wet
      weight of the sample.  However, for solid matrices such as
      soil/sediments, the percent solid content of the sample is also
      reported, if needed by the data user.  The percent solids content of
      fly ash samples is not reported because the fly ash is treated with an
      aqueous acid solution prior to extraction.

1.7   This method is designed for use only by analysts experienced with
      residue analysis and skilled in HRGC/LRMS..

1.8   Because of the extreme toxicity of these compounds, the analyst must
      take necessary precautions to prevent exposure of personnel to
      materials known or believed to contain PCDDs/PCDFs.

2.    Summary of Method

2.1   Soil/Sediment Extraction

      For the purposes of this method,  a soil/sediment sample is defined as a
      portion of wet soil/sediment which does not contain oil, but which may
      contain other solids such as stones, vegetation, etc.  The sample
      should not contain an obvious liquid phase (see Section 8.4).  A 10 g
      aliquot of the soil/sediment sample is spiked with the internal
      standard solution and extracted with toluene in a combination of a
      Soxhlet extractor and a Dean Stark water separator (SDS).

2.2   Water Extraction

      For the purposes of this method,  a water sample is defined as a single
      phase,.system that is primarily clear water but may contain very small

                                   D-5                               DFLM01.0

-------
      amounts of floating,  suspended and settled particulate matter.
      Multiple phases should not be present (see Section 8.4).   Approximately
      1 L of the water sample is spiked with the internal standard solution
      and filtered to separate the aqueous and particulate fractions.   The
      filtered aqueous fraction is extracted with methylene chloride  using a
      separatory funnel or continuous liquid-liquid extractor.   The
      particulate fraction is extracted with toluene in a SDS extractor.   The
      extracts of the two fractions are then combined for cleanup.

2.3   Fly Ash Extraction

      For the purposes of this method,  a fly ash sample is defined as a solid
      matrix from an incineration or other combustion process which may
      contain water and other solids.  It should not contain an obvious
      liquid phase.  A 10 g aliquot of the fly ash is washed with dilute
      hydrochloric acid, spiked with the internal standard solution,  and
      extracted with toluene in a SDS extractor.

2.4   Chemical Waste Sample Extraction

      For the purposes of this method,  a chemical waste sample includes
      sample matrices of oils, stillbottoms,  oily sludge, oil-laced soil,  and
      surface water heavily contaminated with the matrices listed above (see
      Section 8.2).  Internal standards are added in the concentrations
      listed in Table 4 to a 1 or 10 g aliquot of chemical waste.  Wet fuel
      oil and oily sludge samples, showing signs of water, are spiked with
      the internal standard solution, fitted with a reflux condenser  and a
      Dean Stark water separator to remove the water, and extracted with
      toluene.  Stillbottom samples are spiked with the internal standard
      solution, refluxed with toluene,  and filtered.

2.5   Cleanup and Analysis
                                                                   07
      Immediately prior to cleanup, all extracts are spiked with a   Cl-2378-
      TCDD standard.  Because it is added after extraction, the recovery of
      this standard may be used to differentiate between losses of analytes
      or internal standards during extraction and losses that occur during
      the various cleanup procedures.  The extracts are subjected to an acid-
      base washing treatment and dried.  Following a solvent exchange step,
      the extract is cleaned up by column chromatographic procedures,
      including silica gel, acid alumina, and carbon on celite columns, to
      eliminate sample components that may interfere with the detection and
      measurement of FCDDs/FCDFs.  The extracts are concentrated and the
      solvent is exchanged to tridecane.  The recovery standards are added to
      an aliquot (50 uL) of the extract and the aliquot is reduced to the
      final volume of 50 uL. The remaining 50 uL of extract is retained in
      the event that dilutions or reanalyses are required.  One or two uL of
      the concentrated aliquot containing the recovery standards are injected
      onto a  fused silica capillary  column in a gas chromatograph  (GC)
      interfaced to a mass spectrometer  (MS) (see Paragraph 4.1.1).

      The identification of PCDD/FCDF isomers is based on the simultaneous
      detection of the  two most abundant ions in the molecular ion regions
      and^the M-COC1  ion.  In addition, the identification of OCDD and five

                                    D-6                              DFLM01.0

-------
      of the 2,3,7,8-substituted isomers,  for which a 13C-labeled standard is
      available in the internal standard and recovery standard solutions,  is
      based on their exact retention time (-1 to  3  seconds  from the
      respective internal or recovery standard  signal).   The  2,3,7,8-
      substituted isomers for which   C-labeled standards are not available
      in the sample extracts are identified by  the  relative retention  times
      of the isomer in the daily standard as compared to  the  appropriate
      internal standard.

      The identification of all other PCDD/PCDF isomers  is  based on their
      retention times falling within their respective PCDD/PCDF retention
      time windows as established by a window defining mix.  Confirmation  of
      all PCDDs/PCDFs is based on a comparison  of the ratio of the integrated
      ion abundance of the molecular ion species  to the  theoretical ion
      abundance ratio.

      The PCDDs/PCDFs are quantitated by comparing  the MS response of  the
      detected analyte relative to the MS response  of the appropriate    C-
      labeled internal standard (Table 2).  The responses of  both the  ions
      monitored for each analyte are used for quantitation.  The labeled
      internal standards are added prior to sample  extraction.  Thus,  the
      quantitative results for the native analytes  are corrected for the
      recovery of the internal standards, based on  the assumption that losses
      of the internal standards during sample preparation and analysis are
      equal to the losses of the unlabeled PCDDs/PCDFs.

2.6   The recovery of the internal standards is determined  by comparing the
      MS response of the internal standard to the MS response of the
      appropriate recovery standard (Table 2).  The recovery  standards are
      also isotopically labeled compounds, and  are  added to each sample
      extract and blank aliquot just prior to injection.

      Because the ability to quantify the concentrations of the unlabeled
      analytes and the p'recision of the measurements are related to the
      recovery of the internal standards, upper and lower limits are placed
      on the percent recovery of the internal standards  (see  Paragraphs
      15.5.2 and 17.1.1).

2.7   If the concentration of any PCDD/PCDF exceeds the  calibration range of
      the instrument, a dilution must be performed to bring that
     .concentration within range.  Additional recovery standard solution is
      added to the diluted sample extract immediately prior to reanalysis
      (see Section 10.4).

      If the MS response of any internal standard in the diluted sample is
      less than 10% of its MS response in the continuing calibration
      standard, the unlabeled PCDD/PCDF concentrations in the sample are
      estimated using the MS responses of the recovery standards (see
      Paragraph 15.3).  The purpose of this requirement is to ensure that
      there is an adequate MS response for quantitation.

2.8   In order to provide information on recovery of the analytes of interest
      from the sample matrix, the laboratory must prepare a second aliquot of
      one ^sample of each matrix in each Sample  Delivery Group  (SDG) and spike

                                    D-7                              DFLM01.0

-------
      it with the analytes at concentrations specified in Section 13.  This
      aliquot is analyzed and the recovery of the spiked analytes is
      determined.

2.9   In order to provide information on the precisio-  of the analysis in the
      sample matrix, the laboratory must perform a duplicate analysis on one
      sample of each matrix in each SDG.  The samples to be analyzed in
      duplicate may be specified by the Region in advance; however,  if no
      samples are so specified, the laboratory must select a sample of each
      matrix for duplicate analyses.  The precision of the analysis is
      determined as the relative percent difference of the concentrations as
      specified in Section 14.

2.10  Due to a variety of situations that may occur during contract
      performance, the laboratory shall be required to reextract and
      reanalyze certain samples or groups of samples.  As used hereafter,
      except in the case of dilutions, the term "rerun" shall indicate sample
      reextraction, cleanup and reanalysis.  When dilutions are required, the
      original extract shall be diluted and reanalyzed (see Section 10.4).

      When the rerun is required due to matrix effects, interferences or
      other problems encountered, the Government will pay the Contractor for
      the reruns.  Such reruns shall be billable and accountable under the
      specified contract allotment of automatic reruns.  When the rerun is
      required due to Contractor materials, equipment or instrumentation
      problems or lack of Contractor adherence to specified contract
      procedures, the rerun shall not be billable nor accountable under the
      terms of this contract.  The Contractor's failure to perform any of the
      sample reruns specified herein, either billable or nonbillable, shall
      be construed as Contractor nonperformance and may result in the
      termination of the contract for default.  Specific requirements for
      reextraction and reanalysis are given in Section 17.

      NOTE:  A contaminated method blank is the only circumstance that may
             require more than one rerun per  sample.

3.    Interferences

3.1   Any compound that yields ions listed in Table 5 and also elutes within
      the retention time window of the corresponding homologue is a potential
      interference.  PCDDs/FCDFs are often associated with other chlorinated
      compounds  such as polychlorinated biphenyls  (PCBs) and polychlorinated
      diphenyl ethers  (FCDPEs).  These compounds may be found at
      concentrations several  orders of magnitude higher than that of  the
      analytes of interest and may otherwise  interfere with the analysis  of
      PCDDs/PCDFs.  Therefore, the retention  time  of the  target analytes  must
      be verified using reference standards and compared  to retention time
      windows established during the  calibration.  While  the cleanup
      procedures specified in this method  are designed to minimize  these
      interferences, some samples may ultimately require  additional cleanup
      steps  to achieve the detection limits.

 3.2   Solvents,  reagents, glassware,  and other sample  processing hardware may
      yield  discrete artifacts and/or elevated baselines  which may  cause

                                    D-8                              DFLM01.0

-------
      misinterpretation of chromatographic data.  All of these materials
      shall be demonstrated to be free from interferents under the conditions
      of analysis by running laboratory method blanks.

      NOTE:    Because  of  the possibility  of contamination, analvsts  should
               avoid using PVC gloves.  However, latex gloves may  be  adequate.

3.3   The use of high purity reagents and solvents helps to minimize
      interference problems.  Purification of solvents by distillation in all
      glass systems may be necessary.

3.4   High resolution capillary columns are used to resolve as many PCDD/PCDF
      isomers as possible.  No single column is known to resolve all 210 of
      the isomers.  The columns employed by the laboratory in these analyses
      must be capable of resolving the 17 2,3,7,8-substituted PCDDs/PCDFs
      sufficiently to meet the method specifications (see Section 7.1).

4.    Apparatus and Equipment

      Brand names and catalog numbers are for  illustrative purposes only and
      do not imply an endorsement by EPA.   Equivalency of materials from
      other suppliers may be demonstrated by performing analyses that meet
      the specifications of this method.

4.1   Gas Chromatograph/Mass Spectrometer/Data System (GC/MS/DS)

      4.1.1   The GC shall be capable of temperature programming and be
              equipped with all required accessories, such as syringes,
              gases, and a capillary column.  The GC injection port shall be
              designed for capillary columns;  a splitless or an on-column
              injection technique is recommended.   A 2 uL injection volume is
              assumed throughout this method;  however, with some GC injection
              ports, other volumes may be more appropriate.  A 1 uL injection
              volume may be used if adequate sensitivity and precision can be
              demonstrated.

              NOTE:  The  injection volume for all sample extracts, blanks,
                     quality control  (QC) samples and calibration solutions
                     shall be the same.

      4.1.2   Mass spectral data shall be obtained using a low resolution
              instrument that utilizes 70 volts (nominal) electron energy in
              the electron impact mode.  The system shall be capable of
              selected ion monitoring (SIM) for at least 18 ions per cycle,
              with a cycle time of 1 second or less.  Minimum integration
              time for SIM is 25 milliseconds per m/z.  The integration time
              used to analyze samples shall be identical to the time used to
              analyze the initial and continuing calibration solutions and QC
              samples.  Total data acquisition time per cycle (18 ions)  must
              not exceed 1 second.

      4.1.3   An interfaced data system is required to acquire, store, reduce
              and output mass spectral data.
                                   D'9                              DFLM01.0

-------
      4.1.4    GC/MS  interfaces constructed of all glass or glass-lined
               materials  are  required.  Glass can be deactivated by silanizing
               with dichlorodimethylsilane.  Inserting a fused silica column
               directly into  the MS source is recommended; care must be  taken
               not to expose  the end of the column to the electron beam.

      4.1.5    The Contractor shall use a magnetic media storage device
               capable of recording data suitable for long-term off-line
               storage.   The  Contractor shall record all raw GC/MS data
               acquired during the entire contract period on magnetic media in
               appropriate  instrument manufacturer format.

4.2   GC Column

      Fused silica capillary columns  are required.   The columns  shall
      demonstrate the required separation of all 2378-specific isomers
      whether a dual column or a single column analysis is  chosen.   Column
      operating conditions shall be evaluated at the beginning and end of
      each 12-hour period during which samples or concentration calibration
      solutions are analyzed (see Section 7.4).

      Isomer specificity for all 2,3,7,8-substituted PCDDs/PCDFs cannot be
      achieved on the 60 m DB-5 column.   In order to determine the
      concentration of the individual 2,3,7,8-substituted isomers,  if the
      toxicity equivalence is greater than 0.7 ppb (solids),  7 ppt (aqueous),
      or 7 ppb (chemical waste),  the  sample extract shall be reanalyzed on a
      60 m SP-2330 or SP-2331 (or equivalent)  GC column.

      For any sample analyzed on a DB-5 (or equivalent) column in which
      either 2378-TCDD or 2378-TCDF is reported as an Estimated Maximum
      Possible Concentration (see Section 15.7), regardless of TEF-adjusted
      concentration or matrix,  analysis of the extract is required on a
      second GC column which provides better specificity for these two
      isomers.

      Analysis on a single column is acceptable if the required separation of
      all the  2378-specific  isomers is demonstrated and the minimum
      acceptance criteria outlined in Sections 7.1,  7.2 and 7.3 are met.  See
      Section  11 for the specifications for the analysis of the 2378-specific
      isomers  using both dual columns and single columns.

4.3   Miscellaneous Equipment

      The following list of  items does not necessarily constitute an
      exhaustive compendium  of the equipment needed for this analytical
      method.

      4.3.1    Nitrogen evaporation apparatus  (N-Evap* Analytical  Evaporator
               Model 111.  Organomation Association  Inc., Northborough,  MA,  or
               equivalent).

      4.3.2    Balance capable  of accurately weighing  + 0.01  g.
                                   D-10                              DFLM01.0

-------
      4.3.3   Water bath.  Equipped with concentric ring cover and
              temperature controlled within ± 2s C.

      4.3.4   Stainless steel (or glass) pan large enough to hold contents of
              1-pint sample containers.

      4.3.5   Glove box.  For use in preparing standards from neat materials
              and in handling soil/sediment samples containing fine
              particulates that may pose a risk of exposure.

      4.3.6   Rotary evaporator, R-110.  Buchi/Brinkman - American Scientific
              No. E5045-10 or equivalent.

      4.3.7   Centrifuge.  Capable of operating at 400 x G with a 250-300 mL
              capacity.

      4.3.8   Drying oven.

      4.3.9   Vacuum oven.  Capable of drying solvent-washed solid reagents
              at 110°C.

      4.3.10  Mechanical shaker.  A magnetic stirrer, wrist-action or
              platform-type shaker, that produces vigorous agitation.  Used
              for pre-treatment of fly ash samples.
4.4   Glassware
      4.4.1    Extraction jars.  Amber glass with Teflon-lined screw cap;
               minimum capacity  of approximately 200 mL; must be compatible
               with mechanical shaker to be used.

      4.4.2    Kuderna-Danish (KD)  Apparatus.  500 mL evaporating flask, 10 mL
               graduated concentrator tubes with ground glass stoppers,  three
               ball macro-Synder column.

      4.4.3    Disposable Pasteur  pipets, 150 mm long x 5 mm ID.

      4.4.4    Disposable serological pipets, 10 mL for preparation of the
               carbon column specified in Section 9.10.

      4.4.5    Vials.   0.3 mL and  2 mL amber borosilicate glass with conical
               shaped reservoir  and screw caps lined with Teflon-faced
               silicone disks.

      4.4.6    Funnels.  Glass;  appropriate size to accommodate filter paper
               (12.5  cm).

      4.4.7    Chromatography Columns.   300 mm x 10.5 mm glass chromatographic
               column fitted with  Teflon stopcock.

      4.4..8    Soxhlet Apparatus,  500 mL flask, all glass.  Complete with
               glass  extractor body, condenser, glass  extraction thimbles,
               heating mantle, and variable transformer for heat control.
                                   D-ll                              DFLM01.0

-------
              NOTE:    Extraction thimbles must be  of stifficient  size  to hold
                       100  g  of  sand,  5  g of silica gel,  and at least  10 g  of
                       solid  sample, with room to mix the sand and sample in
                       the  thimble.

      4.4.9   Dean Stark Water Separator Apparatus, with a Teflon stopcock.
              Must fit between Soxhlet extractor body and condenser.

      4.4.10  Concentrator tubes.  15 mL conical centrifuge tubes.

      4.4.11  Separatory funnels.  125 mL and 2 L separatory funnels with a
              Teflon stopcock.

      4.4.12  Continuous Liquid-Liquid Extractor.  1 L sample capacity,
              suitable for use with heavier than water solvents.

      4.4.13  Boiling chips.   Teflon boiling chips washed with hexane prior
              to use.

      4.4.14  Buchner funnel.  15 cm.

      4.4.15  Filtration flask.  For use with Buchner funnel, 1 L capacity.

4.5   Glassware Cleaning Procedures

      Reuse of glassware should be minimized to  avoid the risk of using
      contaminated glassware.  All glassware that is reused shall be
      scrupulously cleaned as soon as possible after use, applying the
      following procedure.

      4.5.1   Rinse glassware with the last solvent used in it.

      4.5.2   Wash with hot water containing detergent.

      4.5.3   Rinse with copious amounts of tap water and several portions of
              distilled water.  Drain dry.

      4.5.4   Rinse with high purity acetone and hexane.

      4.5.5   After glassware is dry, store  inverted or  capped with aluminum
              foil in  a clean environment.

      Do not bake reusable glassware as a routine part of cleaning.  Baking
      may be warranted after particularly dirty samples are encountered, but
      should be minimized,  as repeated baking may cause active sites on the
      glass surface that will irreversibly adsorb PCDDs/PCDFs.

      CAUTION:  The analysis  for PCDDs/PCDFs in water samples is  for much
                lower concentrations  than in soil/sediment,  fly  ash, or
                chemical waste samples.   Extreme  care must be taken to prevent
                cross-contamination between soil/sediment,  fly ash,  chemical
                waste and water samples.  Therefore,  it is strongly
                recommended that separate glassware be reserved for analyzing
          ,_     water samples.

                                   D-12                              DFLM01.0

-------
4.6   Freextraction of Glassware

      It is required that all glassware be rinsed or preextracted with
      solvent immediately before use.  The SDS apparatus and continuous
      liquid-liquid extractors must be preextracted for approximately three
      hours immediately prior to use.  The pooled waste solvent for a set of
      extractions may be concentrated and analyzed as a method of
      demonstrating that the glassware was free of contamination.

      It is recommended that each piece of reusable glassware be numbered in
      such a fashion that the laboratory can associate all reusable glassware
      with the processing of a particular sample.  This procedure will assist
      the laboratory in tracking down possible sources of contamination for
      individual samples, identifying glassware associated with highly
      contaminated samples that may require extra cleaning, and determining
      when glassware should be discarded.

5.    Reagents and Const

      Brand names and catalog numbers are for illustrative purposes only and
      do not imply an endorsement by EPA.  Equivalency of materials from
      other suppliers may be demonstrated by performing analyses that meet
      the specifications of this method.

5.1  " Solvents.  High purity, distilled-in-glass:  hexane, methanol,
      methylene chloride, toluene, isooctane, cyclohexane, acetone, tridecane
      (or nonane).

5.2   Filters

      5.2.1    Filter paper.  Whatman No.  1  or equivalent.

      5.2.2    Glass fiber filter.  15 cm,  for use with Buchner funnel.

      5.2.3    0.45 micron,  Millipore or equivalent,  PTFE or other material
               compatible with toluene.   Rinse with toluene.

5.3   White quartz  sand.  60/70 mesh, for use  in the  SDS extractor.  Bake  at
      450°C for 4 hours minimum.

5.4   Glass wool,  silanized.  Extract with methylene  chloride  and hexane
      before use.

5.5   Sodium Sulfate.   Granular, anhydrous.  Before use, heat  to 400°C in  a
      shallow  tray for  approximately 4  hours,  cool in a  desiccator,  and store
      in a glass  jar.

5.6   Potassium Hydroxide.  ACS grade,  prepare a 20%  (w/v)  solution in
      distilled water.

5.7   Sulfuric Acid,  concentrated.   ACS grade,  specific  gravity 1.84.

5.8   Sodium Chloride.   ACS  grade, prepare  a 5% (w/v) solution in distilled
      water.

                                   D-13                             DFLM01.0

-------
5.9   Hydrochloric Acid, concentrated.  ACS grade,  specific gravity 1.17.
      Prepare a IN solution in distilled water for pretreatment of fly ash
      samples.

5.10  Column Chromatography Reagents

      5.10.1  Alumina,  acidic AG4, Bio Rad Laboratories  (catalogue #132-1240)
              or  equivalent.  Soxhlet extract with methylene chloride for 21
              hours  and activate by heating  in a foil-covered glass container
              for 24 hours at 190°C.

      5.10.2  Charcoal  Carbon.  Active carbon AX-21  (Anderson Development
              Company,  Adrian, HI, or equivalent), prewashed with methanol
              and dried in vacuo at 110°C.

      5.10.3  Celite 545 (Supelco or  equivalent).

      5.10.4  Silica gel.  High purity grade, type 60, 70-230 mesh; Soxhlet
              extract with methylene  chloride for 21 hours and activate  by
              heating in a foil-covered  glass container  for 24 hours at
              190'C.

      5.10.5  Silica gel impregnated  with  2% (w/w) sodium hydroxide.  Add 1
              part by weight of 1 M NaOH solution to 2 parts silica gel
               (extracted and activated)  in a screw-cap bottle and mix with a
              glass  rod until free of lumps.

      5.10.6  Silica gel impregnated  with  40%  (w/w)  sulfuric acid.  Add  2
              parts  by  weight concentrated sulfuric  acid to 3 parts silica
              gel (extracted and activated), mix with a  glass rod until  free
              of  lumps, and store in  a  screw-cap glass bottle.

5.11  Calibration Solutions (Table 3)

      Five tridecane (or nonane) solutions (CC1-CC5) containing 10 unlabeled
      and 7 carbon-labeled PCDDs/PCDFs at  known concentrations which are used
      to calibrate the  instrument.  One  of these five solutions (CC3) is used
      as the continuing calibration solution and contains 7 additional
      unlabeled 2,3,7,8-substituted isomers  that are commercially supplied
       (see Paragraph 7.3.2.1).  The concentration ranges are homologue-
      dependent with the lowest concentrations associated with tetra- and
      pentachlorinated  dioxins and furans  (0.1-2.0 ng/uL), and the higher
      concentrations associated with  the hexa- through octachlorinated
      homologues  (0.5-10.0 ng/uL).  Depending on the availability of
      materials,  the Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory  (EMSL-LV)
      will provide these solutions, with the exception of  the additional
      2,3,7,8-substituted isomers for the  CC3 solution.

5.12  Internal Standard Solution (Table  4)

      The  solution contains the five  internal standards  in tridecane  (or
      nonane) at  the nominal concentrations  listed in Table 4.  Depending on
       the  availability  of materials,  EMSL-LV will  provide  the  solution.  Mix
       10 uL^with  1.0 mL of acetone before  adding to  each sample and blank.

                                   D-14                              DFLM01.0

-------
5.13  Recovery Standard Solution

      The hexane solution contains the recovery standards,   Ci2-1234-TCDD
      and 13Ci2' 123789 -HxCDD, at concentrations of 5.0 ng/uL, in a solvent
      other than tridecane or nonane (see Section 10.2).  Depending upon the
      availability of materials, EMSL-LV will provide the solution.

5.14  Continuing Calibration Solution

      This solution contains standards to be used for identification and
      quantitation of target analytes.  In order to have all 2,3,7,8-
      substituted isomers and the cleanup standard present for quantitation
      purposes, a commercially supplied supplemental standard and the cleanup
      standard solution are combined with the EPA- supplied CC4 solution to
      produce the CC3 solution (see Paragraph 7.4.1).   This solution is
      identified in Table 3.

5.15  Window Defining Mix

      This solution is to be obtained by the laboratory through commercial
      vendors.  The solution contains the first and last eluting isomer of
      each homologue (see Table 9)  and is used to verify that the switching
      times between the descriptors have been appropriately set.

      The window defining mix need not contain any of the labeled internal or
      recovery standards, as no quantitative measurements are based on this
      mixture.  However, these standards and other isomers may be added to
      the mixture listed in Table 7 at the discretion of the laboratory, so
      long as the additional contents of the mixture are clearly specified in
      every SDG Narrative.

      If the laboratory employs a GC column that has a different elution
      order than those specified here, the laboratory must ensure that the
      first and last eluting isomers in each homologue are represented in the
      window defining mix used to evaluate that column.  The concentrations
      of any additional isomers should be approximately the same as those
      listed in Table 9.

      EMSL-LV does not supply the window defining mix (see Table 9) .

5.16  Supplemental Calibration Solution

      This solution contains seven 2, 3, 7, 8 -substituted PCDD/PCDF isomers to
      be added to the CC4 solution to produce the CC3 solution that is used
      for identification and quantitation of target analytes.  EMSL-LV does
      not supply this solution (see Table 10) .

5 . 17  Cleanup Standard
                             Q-7
      This solution contains -"C14-2378-TCDD at a concentration of 5 ng/uL (5
      ug/mL) in tridecane (or nonane) and is added to all sample extracts
      prior to cleanup.  The solution may be added at this concentration or
                                   D-15                              DFLM01.0

-------
      diluted into a larger volume of solvent (see Paragraph 9.7.1).  The
      recovery of this compound is used to judge the efficiency of the
      cleanup procedures.

5.18  Matrix Spiking Standard

      This solution contains 10 of the 2,3,7,8-substituted isomers, at the
      concentrations listed in Table 11 in tridecane (or nonane),  and is used
      to prepare the spiked sample aliquot (see Section 13).   Dilute 10 uL of
      this standard to 1.0 mL with acetone and add to the aliquot chosen for
      spiking.

5.19  Column Performance Solution

      The laboratory must obtain this solution through commercial vendors.
      The solution contains 2378-TCDD and the other TCDD isomers (1478-TCDD
      and the 1237/1238-TCDD pair) that elute closest to 2378-TCDD on the SP-
      2331 (or equivalent) column.  The solution is used to verify the
      chromatographic resolution of the SP-2331 (or equivalent) GC column.
      The concentrations of these isomers should be approximately 0.5 ng/uL
      in tridecane (or nonane).

      If the laboratory employs a GC column that has a different elution
      order than those specified here, the laboratory must ensure that the
      isomers eluting closest to 2378-TCDD are represented in the column
      performance solution.

      EMSL-LV does not supply the column performance solution.

6.    Mass Calibration

      Mass calibration of the MS is recommended prior to analyzing the
      calibration solutions, blanks, samples and QC samples.   It is
      recommended that the instrument be tuned to greater sensitivity in the
      high mass range in order to achieve better response for the later
      eluting compounds.  Optimum results using FC-43 for mass calibration
      may be achieved by scanning from 222-510 amu every one second or less,
      utilizing 70 volts (nominal) electron energy in the electron ionization
      mode.  Under these conditions, m/z 414 and m/z 502 should be 30-50% of
      m/z 264 (base peak).

7.    Retention Time Windows and Calibration of Target Analytes

      Prior to the calibration of the GC/MS system, it is necessary to
      establish the appropriate switching  times for the SIM descriptors  (see
      Table 7) and to verify the chromatographic resolution.  The  switching
      times are determined by  the analysis of the window defining  mix,
      containing  the  first and last eluting isomers in each homologue  (see
      Table 9) .   Chromatographic  resolution is verified by the analysis  of
      one of  two  solutions, depending on the GC column used for analysis.

      Two types of calibration procedures, initial and continuing, are
      required.   The  initial  calibration is required before any samples  are
      analyzed^for PCDDs/PCDFs,  and intermittently throughout  sample

                                    D-16                              DFLM01.0

-------
      analysis, as dictated by the results of the continuing calibration (see
      Section 7.4).  The continuing calibration is required at the beginning
      of each 12-hour time period during which samples are analyzed.

      Samples shall not be analyzed until acceptable descriptor switching
      times, chromatographic resolution, and calibrations, as Described in
      Sections 7.1, 7.2, 7.3 and 7.4,  are achieved and documented.  The
      sequence of analyses is shown in Table 13.

7.1   Window Defining Mix

      The window defining mix shall be analyzed before any calibration
      standards in order to evaluate the descriptor switching times.  The
      commercially available mix (see  Section 5.15) contains the first and
      last eluting isomers in each homologue.   Mixes are available for
      various columns.   The mix for the DB-5 (or equivalent) column may not
      be appropriate for the SP-2331 or other columns.

      The ions in each of the four recommended descriptors are arranged so
      that there is overlap between the descriptors.   The ions for the TCDD,
      TCDF,  PeCDD and PeCDF isomers are in the first descriptor,  the ions for
      the PeCDD,  PeCDF,  HxCDD and HxCDF isomers are in the second descriptor,
      the ions for the  HxCDD,  HxCDF, HpCDD and HpCDF isomers are  in the third
      descriptor,  and the ions for the HpCDD,  HpCDF,  OCDD and OCDF isomers
      are in the fourth descriptor.

      The descriptor switching times are set such that the isomers that elute
      from the GC during a given retention time window will also  be those
      isomers for which the ions  are monitored.   For the homologues that
      overlap between descriptors,  the laboratory may use discretion in
      setting the switching times.  However,  do not set descriptor switching
      times  such that a change in descriptors  occurs  at or near the expected
      retention time of any of the 2,3,7,8-substituted isomers.

      The window defining mix need not contain any of the labeled internal or
      recovery standards,  as no quantitative measurements are based on this
      mixture.   However,  these standards and other isomers may be added to
      the mixture listed in Table 7 at the discretion of the laboratory,  so
      long as the additional contents  of the mixture  are clearly  specified in
      every  SDG Narrative.

      7.1.1    Analyze a 2 uL aliquot of the window defining mix,  using the GC
              column conditions in Table 1.

      7.1.2    Adjust the descriptor switching times and the GC column
              conditions as needed to ensure that the isomers elute in the
              appropriate ion descriptors (see Table 7).

      7.1.3    The window defining mix must be analyzed at the following
              frequency:

              7.1.3.1    Before initial calibration on each instrument and GC
                         column used for analysis.
                                  D-17                              DFLM01.0

-------
              7.1.3.2    Each time a new initial calibration is performed,
                         regardless of reason.

              7.1.3.3    Each time adjustments  or instrument maintenance
                         activities are performed that may affect retention
                         times .
              7.1.3.4   .Any time the retention time of either the
                         1234-TCDD or 13C12- 123789 -HxCDD recovery standards
                         in any analysis varies by more than 10 seconds from
                         its retention time in the most recent continuing
                         calibration standard (see Paragraphs 7.3.2.3,
                         7.5.2.1 and 11.1.4)

      7.1.4   If the laboratory employs a GC column that has a different
              elution order than those columns specified here, the laboratory
              must ensure that the first and last eluting isomers in each
              homologue are represented in the window defining mix used to
              evaluate that column.  The concentrations of any additional
              isomers should be approximately the same as those listed in
              Table 9.

      7.1.5   Analysis on a single GC column (as opposed to situations
              requiring a second column confirmation) is acceptable if the
              required separation of all of the 2, 3, 7, 8 -substituted isomers
              is demonstrated and the resolution criteria for both the DB-5
              and SF-2331 (or equivalent) columns are met (see Paragraphs
              7.3.2.1 and 7.2.3).

7.2   Chromatographic Resolution

      7.2.1   For analyses on a DB-5 (or equivalent) GC column, the
              Chromatographic resolution is evaluated by the analysis of the
              CC3 standard during both the initial and continuing calibration
              procedures (see Paragraphs 7.3.2.1 and 7.4.2).

      7.2.2   For analyses on a SP-2331 (or equivalent) GC column, the
              Chromatographic resolution is evaluated before the analysis  of
              any calibration standards by the analysis of a commercially
              available column performance mixture  (see Section 5.19)  that
              contains the TCDD isomers that elute most closely with  2378-
              TCDD on this GC column (1478-TCDD and the 1237/1238-TCDD pair).

              Analyze a 2 uL aliquot of this solution, using the column
              operating conditions and descriptor switching times previously
              established.

              Note:   The  column performance mixture may be combined with the
                      window defining mix into  a single solution,  provided
                      that  the  combined solution contains the isomers  needed
                      to  determine that the criteria for both analyses can be
                      met.
                                   D-18                              DFLM01.0

-------
      7.2.3   GC Resolution Criteria for SP-2331 or Equivalent Column.  The
              chromatographic peak separation between unlabeled 2378-TCDD and
              the peaks representing all other unlabeled TCDD isomers shall
              be resolved with a valley of < 25 percent, where:

              Valley - (x/y)(100).
              y - the peak height of any TCDD isomer.
              x - the distinction from the baseline to the bottom of the
                  valley between adj acent peaks,  measured as shown in
                  Figure 5.

              The resolution criteria must be evaluated using measurements
              made on the selected ion current profile (SICP) for the
              appropriate ions for each isomer.  Measurements are not made
              from total ion current profiles.

              Further analyses may not proceed until the GC resolution
              criteria have been met.

      7.2.4   If the laboratory uses a GC column other than those specified
              here, the laboratory must ensure that the isomers eluting
              closest to 2378-TCDD on that column are used to evaluate GC
              column resolution.  The chromatographic peak separation between
              unlabeled 2378-TCDD and the peaks representing all other
              unlabeled TCDD isomers shall be resolved with a valley of < 25
              percent.

      7.2.5   Analysis on a single GC column (as opposed to situations
              requiring a second column confirmation) is acceptable if the
              required separation of all of the 2,3,7,8-substituted isomers
              is demonstrated and the resolution criteria for both the DB-5
              and SP-2331 (or equivalent) columns are met (see Paragraphs
              7.3.2.1 and 7.2.3).

7.3   Initial Calibration

      Once the window defining mix has been analyzed and the descriptor
      switching times have been verified (and after the analysis of the
      column performance solution if using a GC column other than DB-5),  the
      five concentration calibration solutions (CC1-CC5),  described in Table
      3, shall be analyzed prior to any sample analysis.   The CC1,  CC2, CC4
      and CCS solutions shall be used as provided by EPA.   The CC3 solution
      is prepared by combining CC4 solution,  the  supplemental calibration
      solution,  and the internal,  cleanup,  and recovery standard solutions as
      described in Paragraph 7.4.1.

      7.3.1   Analyze a 2 uL  (see Paragraph 4.1.1) aliquot of each of  the
              five concentration calibration solutions, beginning with CCS
              solution  (see Paragraph 7.4.1).  The following MS/DS conditions
              shall be used:
                                   D-19                              DFLM01.0

-------
        7.3.1.1    Acquire SIM data for each of the ions listed in
                   Table 5 including the ions to monitor interfering
                   compounds.  See Table 7 for the recommended US
                   descriptors.

        7.3.1.2    The total cycle time for data acquisition must be
                   less than one second.  Acquire at least five data
                   points for each ion during the elution of the GC
                   peak.

7.3.2   The Contractor shall not proceed with the sample analysis until
        an acceptable initial calibration has been performed and
        documented according to the following criteria:  GC resolution,
        ion abundance ratios, retention times, and instrument
        sensitivity.

        7.3.2.1    GC Resolution Criteria for DB-5 or Equivalent
                   Column.  The chromatographic peak separation between
                   the 13C12-2378-TCDD peak and 13C12-1234-TCDD isomers
                   shall be resolved with a valley of < 25 percent, in
                   all calibration standards, where:

                   Valley - (x/y)(100).
                   y - the peak height of f^C12-2378-TCDD.
                   x - measured using the   C^2-1234-TCDD peak as shown
                       in Figure 5.

                   In addition, the chromatographic peak separation
                   between the 123478-HxCDD and 123678-HxCDD in the CC3
                   solution shall be resolved with a valley of < 50
                   percent, calculated in a similar fashion as above.

                   The resolution criteria must be evaluated using
                   measurements made on the SICP for the appropriate
                   ions  for each isomer.  Measurements are not made
                   from  total ion current profiles.

         7.3.2.2    The relative ion abundance criteria for PCDDs/PCDFs
                   listed in Table 6 must be met for all PCDD/PCDF
                   peaks, including the labeled internal and recovery
                   standards, in all solutions.  The lower and upper
                   limits of the ion abundance ratios represent  a + 15
                   percent window around  the  theoretical abundance
                   ratio for each pair  of selected ions.  The    Cl-
                   2378-TCDD cleanup standard contains no 35C1,  thus
                   the  ion  abundance ratio  criterion does not apply to
                   this  compound.

         7.3.2.3   For all  calibration solutions,  the retention times
                   of the isomers must fall within the  appropriate
                    retention time windows established by  the window
                    defining mix analysis.   In addition, the  absolute
                    retention times  of  the recovery standards,
                              D-20                             DFLM01.0

-------
                   1234-TCDD and 13C12- 123678 -HxCDD, shall not change
                   by more than 10 seconds between the initial CCS
                   analysis and the analysis of any other standard.

        7.3.2.4    MS Sensitivity.  For all calibration solutions,
                   including the CC1 solution, the signal-to-noise
                   ratio  (S/N) must be greater than 2.5 for the
                   unlabeled PCDD/PCDF ions , and greater than 10 for
                   the internal standard and recovery standard ions.

7.3.3   Calculate  the relative response factors  (RRFs) for the 17
        unlabeled  target  analytes relative  to their appropriate
        internal standards  (RRFn) (see Table 8) , according to the
        formulae below.   For the seven unlabeled analytes and the
        37Cl4-2378-TCDD cleanup standard that are found only in  the CC3
        solution,  only one RRF is calculated for. each analyte.   For the
        other  10 unlabeled analytes , calculate  the RRF of each analyte
        in  each calibration standard.

        Calculate  the RRFs for the five labeled internal standards and
        the cleanup  standard relative to the appropriate recovery
        standard (RRF^g)  (see Table 8) , in  each calibration standard,
        according  to the  following formulae:
        RRFn -
                (An1 t- Q  x Qis
                             x Qn
                 (A,...1 + Ars2)  x Qi
        where :
              tdAn2    -
                         of the  isomer of interest  (Table  5) .
1       2
  and A^    -  integrated areas of the two quantitation ions
            1         2
        Ais  an<* Ais  ~  integrated areas of the two quantitation  ions
                          of the appropriate internal standard  (Table
                          5).

            1         2
        Ars  and Ars  —  integrated areas of the two quantitation  ions
                          of the appropriate recovery standard  (Table
                          5).

        Qn  -  quantity of unlabeled PCDD/PCDF analyte inj ected (ng).

        Qis "  quantity of appropriate internal standard injected (ng).

        Qrs -  quantity of appropriate recovery standard injected (ng).

        For quantitations involving  the use of peak heights instead of
        peak  areas,  see Section 11.4.
                             D-21                              DFLM01.0

-------
        There is only one quantitation ion for the   Cl cleanup
        standard.  Calculate the relative response factor as described
        for RRF^s, using one area for the cleanup standard and the sum
        of the areas of the ions from the recovery standard.

        The RRFn and RRF^g are dimensionless quantities; therefore, the
        units used to express the Qn, Q£S and Qrs must be the same.

        NOTE:  This protocol is based on the assumption that if  the 10
               unlabeled 2,3,7,8-substituted isomers provided in the
               EPA standard solutions meet linearity criteria, then the
               seven additional 2,3,7,8-substituted isomers and  the
               cleanup standard in the CC3 solution may be assumed to
               have a sufficiently linear response to be used for
               quantitation.  These  eight RRFs cannot be used to
               determine percent relative standard deviation, but are
               used for percent difference determinations  (as described
               in Paragraph 7.4.6.4) and quantitation of target
               analytes.

7.3.4   Calculate the relative response factors for the native
        PCDDs/PCDFs relative to the recovery standards (RRFrs) where:

                              RRFrs - RRFn x RRFis

        This relative response factor is necessary when the sample is
        diluted to the extent that the MS response of the internal
        standard  is less than 10 percent of its MS response in the
        continuing calibration standard (see Section 15.3).

7.3.5   Relative Response Factor Criteria.  Calculate the mean RRF and
        percent relative standard deviation (%RSD) of the five RRFs
         (CC1-CC5) for each unlabeled PCDD/PCDF and labeled internal
        standards present in all five concentration calibration
        solutions.

        No mean RRF or %RSD calculations are possible for the 2,3,7,8-
        substituted isomers or the cleanup standard found only in the
        CC3  solution.

                         Standard Deviation
                 %RSD  -  	  x  100
                             Mean RRF

        The  %RSD  of the five RRFs  (CC1-CC5) for the unlabeled
        PCDDs/PCDFs and the internal standards must not exceed 15.0
        percent.

7.3.6   The  response  factors to be used for determining the  total
        homologue concentrations are described  in Section  15.2.
                             D-22                              DFLM01.0

-------
      7.3.7   If any of  the requirements listed in Paragraphs 7.3.2 or 7.3.5
              are not met, the Contractor is responsible for taking
              corrective action before sample analyses are performed. The
              following  suggestions may be useful.

              7.3.7.1    Check and adjust the GC and/or MS operating
                         conditions.

              7.3.7.2    Replace the GC column.

              7.3.7.3    Adjust the MS for greater or lesser resolution using
                         FC-43 (see Section 6).

              7.3.7.4    Recalibrate the mass scale.

              Once the corrective actions have been completed, the Contractor
              must perform a new initial calibration that does meet all the
              QC requirements, beginning with analysis of the window defining
              mix, before sample analyses may proceed.

7.4   Continuing Calibration

      The continuing calibration consists of two parts:  evaluation of the
      chromatographic resolution and verification of  the RRF values to be
      used for quantitation.   At the beginning of each 12-hour period,  the
      chromatographic resolution is verified in the same fashion as in the
      initial calibration:   through the analysis of the CC3 solution on the
      DB-5 (or equivalent)  column or through the analysis of the column
      performance solution on the SP-2331 (or equivalent) column.

      NOTE:  The 12-hour time period is defined as beginning with the
             injection of the CC3 solution on the DB-5 (or equivalent) column
             or the injection of the column performance solution on the SP-
             2331 (or equivalent) column.  The 12-hour period continues until
             12:00 hours have elapsed according to the system clock.  To be
             included in a given 12-hour time period, a sample or standard
             must be inj ected within 12:00 hours of the CC3 solution or the
             column performance solution.

      7.4.1   Prepare the CC3 solution by combining the  following volumes of
              the solutions listed in Section 5:

                  500 uL    CC4 Solution

                  125 uL    Supplemental Calibration Solution

                  50  uL    Internal Standard Solution

                  50  uL    Recovery Standard Solution

                  50  uL    Cleanup Standard Solution

                  225 uL    Tridecane (or nonane)

              to yield a final volume of 1.0 mL at the concentrations
              specified  for the CC3  solution in Table 3.
                                   D-23                              DFLM01.0

-------
7.4.2   For  the DB-5  (or equivalent) column, begin the  12-hour period
        by analyzing  the CCS solution.  Inject a 2 uL aliquot of  the
        continuing calibration solution (CCS) into the  GC/MS.  The
        identical GC/MS/DS conditions used for the analysis of the
        initial calibration solutions must be ved for  the continuing
        calibration solution (see Paragraph 7.3.1).  Evaluate the
        chromatographic resolution using the QC criteria in Paragraph
        7.3.2.1.

7.4.3   For  the SP-2331 (or equivalent) column, or other columns  with
        different elution orders, begin the 12-hour period by analyzing
        a 2  uL aliquot of the appropriate column performance solution.
        Evaluate the  chromatographic resolution using the QC criteria
        in Paragraph  7.2.3 or 7.2.4.  If this solution  meets the  QC
        criteria, proceed with the analysis of a 2 uL aliquot of  the
        CC3  solution.  The identical GC/MS/DS conditions used for the
        analysis of the initial calibration solutions must be used .for
        the  continuing calibration solution (see Paragraph 7.3.1).

7.4.4   Calculate the RRFs for the 17 unlabeled target  analytes
        relative to their appropriate internal standards (RPxFn) and the
        response factors for the five labeled internal  standards  and
        the  cleanup standard relative to the appropriate recovery
        standard (RRF^S), according to the following formulae:

                               + An2) * Qis
                                  Ais
                                   Ais2) x Qrs
                                 + Ars*) x Qis


         An1,  An2,  A^1,  Ais2.  A^1,  Ars2, Qn> Qis  and Qrs
         are defined in Paragraph 7.3.3.

         There is only one quant i tat ion ion for the    Cl cleanup
         standard.   Calculate the relative response  factor as described
         for RRFis,  using one area for the cleanup standard and the sum
         of the areas of the ions from the recovery  standard.

         The RRFn and RRFis are dimensionless quantities; therefore, the
         units used to express the Qn, Q^s and Qrs must be the same.
7.4.5    Calculate the RRFs for the native PCDDs/PCDFs relative to the
         recovery standards (RRFrs) ,  where RRFrs - RRFn x RRFis.   This
         relative response factor is necessary for calculations when the
         sample is diluted (see Section 15.3).

7.4.6    Continuing Calibration Criteria.  The Contractor shall not
         proceed with sample analysis until an acceptable continuing
                              D-24                              DFLM01.0

-------
        calibration has been performed and documented according to the
        following criteria:  GO resolution, ion abundance ratios,
        retention times, instrument sensitivity, and response factors.

        7.4.6.1    GC Column. Resolutior Criteria.   The c^^oma to graphic
                   resolution on the DB-5 (or equivalent) column must
                   meet the QC criteria in Paragraph 7.3.2.1.  The
                   chromatographic resolution on the SP-2331 (or
                   equivalent) column must meet the QC criteria in
                   Paragraph 7.2.3.  In addition,  the chromatographic
                   peak separation between the 123478 -HxCDD and the
                   123678 -HxCDD in the CC3 solution shall be resolved
                   with a valley of < 50 percent.

        7.4.6.2    Ion Abundance Criteria.  The relative ion abundances
                   listed in Table 6 shall be met for all PCDD/PCDF
                   peaks, including the labeled internal and recovery
                   standards .

        7.4.6.3    Instrument Sensitivity Criteria.  For the CC3
                   solution, the S/N ratio shall be greater than 2.5
                   for the unlabeled PCDD/PCDF ions, and greater than
                   10.0 for the labeled internal and recovery
                   standards.

        7.4.6.4    Response Factor Criteria.   The measured RRFs of each
                   analyte and internal standard in the CC3 solution
                   must be within ±30.0 percent of the mean RRFs
                   established during initial calibration for the EPA-
                   supplied standards and within +30.0 percent of the
                   single point RRFs established during initial
                   calibration for the supplemental calibration
                   standards and the cleanup standards.
                   % Difference - (RRFi - RRFC)  x 100

                                      RRFi
                   where :

                   RRFj^ -  Relative response factor established during
                           initial calibration.

                   RRFC -  Relative response factor established during
                           continuing calibration.

7.4.7   If any of the criteria listed in Paragraph 7.4.6 are not met,
        the Contractor must take corrective actions and reanalyze the
        continuing calibration standard (CC3) .  If the criteria in
        Paragraph 7.4.6 are met after the corrective action, then
        sample analysis may begin, as described in Section 10.

        If the criteria in Paragraph 7.4.6 are not met after the
        corrective action, then the Contractor must perform a new
        initial calibration, beginning with the analysis of the window


                             D-25                             DFLM01.0

-------
              defining mix.  This new  initial calibration must meet all of
              the QC criteria in Sections 7.1, 7.2 and 7.3 before sample
              analysis may begin.

7 . 5   Instrument Sensitivity Check

      In order to demonstrate that the GC/MS/DS system has retained adequate
      sensitivity during the course of sample analyses,  the Contractor must
      analyze the lowest of the standards (CC1) at the end of each 12 -hour
      period during which samples and standards are analyzed.

      7.5.1   Analyze a 2 uL aliquot of  the  CC1 solution, using the identical
              instrumental conditions  used for analysis of samples and
              standards .

      7.5.2   The CC1 solution analyzed  at the end of the 12 -hour period must
              meet the following QC criteria:

              7.5.2.1    Retention Time  Criteria.  The absolute retention
                         time of the recovery standards, 13Ci2-1234-TCDD atld
                              - 123678 -HxCDD, shall not change by more than 10
                         seconds between the initial CC3 analysis and the
                         ending CC1 analysis.  If the retention times of
                         either of these standards changes by more than + 10
                         seconds, the Contractor must adjust the switching
                         times of the descriptors and analyze the window
                         defining mix before proceeding with further
                         analyses .

               7.5.2.2    All the analytes in the CC1 solution must meet the
                         ion abundance ratio criteria in Table 6 .

               7.5.2.3    Instrument Sensitivity Criteria.  For the CC1
                         solution, the S/N ratio shall be greater than 2.5
                         for the unlabeled PCDD/PCDF ions and greater than
                         10 . 0 for the labeled internal and recovery
                         standards .

      7.5.3    If the analysis of the  CC1  solution  at the  end of the  12 -hour
               period fails either the ion abundance ratio or S/N  criteria
               above, the Contractor must:

               7.5.3.1   Take corrective  action.

               7.5.3.2   Perform a new initial calibration,  beginning with
                         the analysis of  the window defining mix.

               7.5.3.3   Start  a new  analytical sequence  (see Table  13).

               7.5.3.4   Reanalyze all samples originally analyzed in  the
                         preceding 12 -hour time period  in which:

                         7.5.3.4.1    No  PCDDs/PCDFs were detected.
                                   D-26                              DFIM01.0

-------
                         7.5.4.3.2    Neither 2378-TCDD or 2378-TCDF were
                                      detected,  even if other PCDDs or PCDFs
                                      were detected.

                         7.5.4.3.3    Any 2,3,7,8-substituted PCDD or PCDF is
                                      reported as an Estimated Maximum
                                      Possible Concentration (see Section
                                      15.7).

                         These reanalyses are necessary because poor S/N
                         ratios indicate a loss of sensitivity that could
                         lead to false negative results, underestimation of
                         concentrations, or could cause ion abundance ratios
                         to fall outside the QC limits.

8.     Sample Homogenization. Preservation and Handling

8.1   Homogenization

      Although sampling personnel will attempt to collect homogeneous
      samples, the Contractor shall examine each sample and determine if the
      sample needs phase separation or mixing.  The extent to which phase
      separation or mixing is required will depend on the sample type.

      The Contractor is responsible for taking a representative sample
      aliquot from the phase or phases to be analyzed.  This responsibility
      entails efforts to make the sample phase as homogeneous as possible.
      Stirring is recommended when possible.

8.2   Sample Types

      8.2.1   For the purpose of this method, a chemical waste sample
              includes  the  sample matrices of oils, oily sludge, stillbottom,
              oil-laced soil, and surface water heavily contaminated with any
              of the above  matrices.  The sample may  contain particulates and
              an obvious non-aqueous liquid phase.

      8.2.2   For the purpose of this method, a soil/sediment sample  is
              defined as a  single phase solid system  composed of soil or
              sediment.  The sample may contain stones and vegetation, but
              should not contain an obvious aqueous or non-aqueous liquid
              phase.

              CAUTION:   Finely divided soils contaminated with PCDDs/PCDFs
                         are hazardous because  of the potential for
                         inhalation or ingestion of particles containing the
                         analytes.  Such samples should be handled in a
                         confined environment (e.g., a closed hood or a glove
                         box).

      8.2.3   For the purpose of this method, a water sample is defined as  a
              single phase  system, the primary  component of which  is water.
                                   D-27                              DFLM01.0

-------
              The sample may include floating, suspended and settled
              particulate matter in quantities that do not cause severe
              problems with filtration or extraction.

8.3   Sample Preservation

      8.3.1   Water Samples.  Each water sample received will consist of at
              least two 1-liter (or quart) amber glass bottles.  Store at 4 +
              2°C from collection until extraction.  Do not freeze.  After a
              portion of the sample is removed for analysis, the unused
              portion of the sample is stored at 4 ± 2*C in a locked, limited
              access area for at least 60 days from the date of data
              submission.

      8.3.2   Soil/Fly Ash/Chemical Waste Samples.  Each soil/fly
              ash/chemical waste sample received will be contained in a 1-
              pint glass jar surrounded by vermiculite in a sealed metal
              paint can.  Until a portion is removed for analysis, the sealed
              sample must be stored in a locked, limited access area at room
              temperature.  Do not freeze.  After a portion is removed for
              analysis, the unused portion of the sample is returned to its
              original container and stored at room temperature for at least
              60 days from the date of data submission.

      8.3.3   To minimize the potential for photodecomposition, all samples
              must be protected from light from the time of receipt until
              extraction.

8.4   Sample Handling and Freextraction Treatment

      8.4.1   If a soil/sediment sample contains an obvious aqueous liquid
              phase, decant or centrifuge the sample to separate the phases
               (see Paragraph 8.4.7).

      8.4.2   If a soil/sediment sample does not contain an obvious liquid
              phase, homogenize the sample by careful stirring with a clean
              glass rod or spatula.

      8.4.3   If a soil/sediment sample contains an obvious non-aqueous
              liquid phase, or contains more than two phases  (i.e. non-
              aqueous liquid/aqueous liquid/solid), contact the Sample
              Management Office  (SMO)  in order to determine which phase(s)
              should be analyzed.

      8.4.4   All water samples are filtered prior to extraction, and the
              filtered liquid and the  particulates are extracted separately
               (see Section  9.5).  If a water sample contains  significant
              amounts of suspended particulates, centrifuge the sample  and
              decant  the water from the particulates before filtering
               (Paragraph 8.4.7).

      8.4.5    If  a water sample  contains an obvious non-aqueous liquid  phase
               or  a non-particulate solid phase,  contact SMO in order  to
           -<-   determine which phase (s) should be analyzed.

                                   D-28                              DFLM01.0

-------
      8.4.6    If a water  sample does not contain significant amounts of
               suspended particulates, homogenize the sample by carefully
               shaking the capped sample bottle.

      8.4.7    Centrifugation.  If centrifugation of a sample is necessary,
               place the entire sample in a suitable centrifuge bottle(s) with
               a 250-300 mL capacity, and centrifuge for 30 minutes at 400 x
               G.  Decant  the liquid phase into a clean container.  Remove the
               solid phase by careful pouring or using a clean spatula or
               glass rod.  Proceed with the analysis of the appropriate phase
               or phases.

               CAUTION:   A phase that is not analyzed may contain PCDDs/PCDFs
                          and should be handled and disposed of appropriately.

9.     Extraction Procedures

      Four types of extraction procedures  are employed in these  analyses
      depending on the sample matrix.   Chemical waste  samples  are extracted
      by refluxing with a Dean Stark water separator.   Fly ash samples  and
      soil/sediment samples  are extracted  in a combination of  a  Soxhlet
      extractor and a Dean Stark water separator.   Water  samples  are  filtered
      and then the filtrate  is extracted using either  a separatory funnel
      procedure or a continuous liquid-liquid extraction  procedure.   The
      filtered particulates  are extracted  in a combination of  a  Soxhlet
      extractor and a Dean Stark water separator.

9.1   Chemical Waste Sample  Extraction

      9.1.1    Assemble a  flask (50 mL or 125 mL,  see below), a Dean Stark
               trap, and a condenser, and preextract with toluene for three
               hours. Preextraction will ensure that the glassware is as clean
               as possible and minimize cross-contamination problems.   Discard
               the used toluene, or pool it for later analysis to verify the
               cleanliness of the glassware.

      9.1.2    Oily Sludge/Wet Fuel Oil.  Weigh about 1 g of sample to two
               decimal places into a tared preextracted 125-mL flask.   Add 1
               mL of the acetone-diluted internal standard solution (see
               Section 5.12) to the sample in the flask.  Attach the
               preextracted Dean Stark water separator and condenser to the
               flask, and  extract the sample by refluxing it with 50 mL of
               toluene for at least three hours.

               Continue refluxing the sample until all the water has been
               removed.  Cool the sample, and filter the toluene extract
               through a rinsed glass fiber filter into a 100 mL round bottom
               flask.  Rinse the filter with 10 mL of toluene,  and combine the
               extract and rinsate.   Concentrate the combined solution to
               approximately 10 mL using a rotary evaporator as described in
               Section 9.6.

      9.1.3    Stillbottom/Oil.  Weigh about 1 g of sample to two decimal
               places into a tared preextracted 50-mL flask.   Add 1 mL of the

                                  D-29                              DFLM01.0

-------
              acetone-diluted internal standard solution (see Section 5.12)
              to the sample in the flask.  Attach the preextracted Dean Stark
              water separator and condenser to the flask, and extract the
              sample by refluxing it with 50 mL of toluene for at least three
              hours.

              Cool the sample, and filter the toluene extract through a
              rinsed glass fiber filter into a 100 mL round bottom flask.
              Rinse the filter with 10 mL of toluene, and combine the extract
              and rinsate.  Concentrate the combined solution to
              approximately 10 mL using a rotary evaporator as described in
              Section 9.6.

      9.1.4   Prepare a sample aliquot for the duplicate sample analysis and
              a sample aliquot for the spiked sample analysis, using the
              procedures in Sections 13 and 14 and at the frequency given in
              those sections.

9.2   Soxhlet-Dean Stark (SDS)  Apparatus

      The combination of a Soxhlet extractor and a Dean Stark moisture trap
      is used for the removal of water and extraction of PCDDs/PCDFs from
      samples of fly ash,  soil/sediment,  and the particulate fraction of
      water samples.   The combination consists  of a Soxhlet extractor body
      with a Dean Stark moisture trap fitted between the extractor and the
      condenser (see Figure 4).

      Procedures for the use of this apparatus  were developed by the Dow
      Chemical Company and have been tested by  the EPA Industrial Technology
      Division,  Office of Water Regulations and Standards.   Those tests
      indicate that based on the recovery of labeled analytes,  the extraction
      by SDS apparatus is as good,  or better, than extraction by Soxhlet
      alone.

      For soil/sediment samples,  the results of these analyses are reported
      based on the wet weight of the sample.  However,  use  of the SDS
      apparatus allows the water content  of a sample to be  determined from
      the same aliquot of sample that is  also extracted for analysis.  The
      amount of water evolved from the sample during extraction is used to
      approximate the percent solids content of the sample.   The percent
      solids data may be employed by the  data user to approximate the dry
      weight concentrations.   The percent solids determination does not apply
      to the extraction of particulates from the filtration of water samples
      or to the extraction of fly ash samples which are treated with an HCl
      solution prior to extraction.

      Further, as described here, the SDS apparatus allows  the extraction of
      sample matrices containing water without  the addition of drying agents
      such as sodium sulfate.  The use of sodium sulfate during extraction
      may be responsible for the loss of analytes, through adsorption onto
      carbon particles produced by baking this  reagent at high temperatures
      in order to remove organic contaminants,  and by trapping analytes in
      pores in the sodium sulfate as moisture is adsorbed.
                                   D-30                              DFLM01.0

-------
The following procedures apply to all uses of the SDS apparatus for
extracting matrices covered by this protocol.

NOTE:   It may be necessary to wrap portions of the SDS apparatus with
       aluminum foil or glass wool to obtain proper operation.

9.2.1   Refer to Section 4.5 for detailed instructions on cleaning
        glassware such as the SDS apparatus.  In particular,  do not
        bake the components of the SDS apparatus as part of  routine
        cleaning, as repeated baking of glassware can cause  active
        sites on the glass surface that will adsorb PCDDs/PCDFs and
        other analytes.  All glass parts of  the SDS apparatus,
        including the thimbles, must be preextracted with toluene for
        approximately three hours immediately prior to use.
        Freextraction will ensure that the glassware is as clean as
        possible and minimize cross-contamination problems.   Discard
        the used toluene, or pool it for later analysis to verify the
        cleanliness of the glassware.

9.2.2   The extraction of soil/sediment, fly ash, and particulates from
        water samples will require the use of a Soxhlet thimble.  Prior
        to preextraction, prepare the thimble by adding 5 g  of 70/230
        mesh silica gel to the thimble to produce a thin layer in the
        bottom of the thimble.  This layer will trap fine particles in
        the thimble.  Add 80-100 g of quartz sand on top of  the silica
        gel, and place the thimble in the extractor.

9.2.3   After preextraction for three hours, allow the apparatus to
        cool and remove the thimble.  Mix the appropriate weight of
        sample with the sand in the thimble, being careful not to
        disturb the silica gel layer.

        If the sample aliquot to be extracted contains large  lumps or
        is otherwise not easily mixed in the thimble, the sand and
        sample may be mixed in another container.  Transfer
        approximately 2/3 of the sand from the thimble to a  clean
        container, being careful not to disturb the silica gel layer
        when transferring the sand.  Thoroughly mix the sand and the
        sample with a clean spatula, and transfer the sand/sample
        mixture to the thimble.

        If a sample with particularly high moisture content  is to be
        extracted, it may be helpful to leave a. small conical
        depression in the material in the thimble.  This procedure will
        allow the water to drain through the thimble more quickly
        during the early hours of the extraction.  As the moisture  is
        removed during the first few hours of extraction, the
        depression will collapse, and the sample will be uniformly
        extracted.
                             D-31                       DFLM01.1 (9/91)

-------
9.3   Fly Ash Sample Extraction

      9.3.1   Weigh about 10 g of the fly ash to two  decimal places,  and
              transfer to an extraction jar  (Paragraph 4.4.1).  Add  1 mL of
              the acetone-diluted internal standard solution (Section 5.12)
              to the sample.

      9.3.2   Add 150 mL of 1 N HC1 to the fly ash sample  in the jar.   Seal
              the jar with the Teflon-lined  screw cap, place on a mechanical
              shaker, and shake for three hours at room  temperature.

      9.3.3   Rinse a Whatman #1 (or equivalent) filter  paper with toluene,
              and then filter the sample through the  filter paper in a
              Buchner funnel into a 1 L receiving flask.   Wash the fly  ash
              with approximately 500 mL distilled water.

      9.3.4   Mix the fly ash with the sand  in a preextracted thimble,  and
              place the filter paper on top  of the sand.   Place the  thimble
              in a SDS extractor, add 200 mL toluene, and  extract for 16
              hours.

              The solvent must cycle completely through  the system 5-10 times
              per hour.  Cool and filter the toluene  extract through a  rinsed
              glass fiber filter into a 500  mL round-bottom flask.   Rinse the
              filter with 10 mL of toluene.  Concentrate the extract as
              described in Section 9.6.

              NOTE:  A blank must be analyzed using a piece of  filter paper
                     handled  in the same manner as the  fly ash  sample.

      9.3.5   Prepare a sample aliquot for the duplicate sample analysis and
              a sample aliquot for the spiked sample  analysis, using the
              procedures in Sections 13 and  14 and at the  frequency  given in
              those sections.

9.4   Soil/Sediment Sample Extraction

      NOTE:   Extremely wet samples may require centrifugation  to remove
              standing water before extraction  (see Paragraph 8.4.7).

      9.4.1   Weigh about  10  grams of the  soil to two decimal places and
              transfer  to  a preextracted thimble  (see Paragraph 9.2.2).  Mix
              the  sample with the quartz sand, and add  1 mL of  the  acetone-
              diluted  internal standard solution  (see Section  5.12)  to  the
              sample/sand  mixture.  Add small portions  of  the  solution at
              several  sites on the surface of  the sample/sand mixture.

      9.4.2    Place the  thimble  in the SDS apparatus.  Add 200  to  250 mL
               toluene  to  the  SDS apparatus,  and reflux  for 16  hours.  The
               solvent  must cycle completely through  the system 5-10 times per
              hour.

      9.4.3    Estimate the percent solids  content  of the soil/sediment sample
               by measuring the volume  of water evolved during the SDS

                                   D-32                               DFLM01.0

-------
              extraction procedure.  For extremely wet samples, the Dean
              Stark trap may need to be drained one or more times during the
              16-hour extraction.  Collect the water from the trap, and
              measure its volume to the nearest 0.1 mL.  Assume a density of
              1.0 g/mL, and calculate the percent solids content according to
              the formula below:

                                (Wet weight of sample - Weight of water)
              Percent Solids - 	 x 100
                                        Wet weight of sample

      9.4.4   Concentrate this extract as described in Section 9.6.

      9.4.5   Prepare a sample aliquot for the duplicate sample analysis and
              a sample aliquot for the spiked sample analysis, using the
              procedures in Sections 13 and 14 and at the frequency given in
              those sections.

9.5   Water Sample Extraction

      9.5.1   Allow the sample to come to ambient temperature, then mark the
              water meniscus on the side of the 1-L sample bottle for
              determination of the exact sample volume. Add 1 mL of the
              acetone-diluted internal standard solution (see Section 5.12)
              to the sample bottle.  Cap the bottle, and mix the sample by
              gently shaking for 30 seconds.  Filter the sample through a
              0.45 micron filter that has been rinsed with toluene.

              NOTE:  Reagent water used as a blank must also be filtered in a
                     similar fashion and subjected to the same cleanup and
                     analysis as the water samples.

              If the total dissolved and suspended solids contents are too
              much to filter through the 0.45 micron filter, centrifuge the
              sample, decant, and then filter the aqueous phase (see
              Paragraph 8.4.7).  Combine the solids from the centrifuge
              bottle(s), the particulate on the filter and the filter itself,
              and proceed with the SDS extraction in Paragraph 9.5.4.

      9.5.2   The filtered aqueous sample is poured into a 2-L separatory
              funnel.  Add 60 mL methylene chloride to the sample bottle,
              seal, and shake for 60 seconds to rinse the inner surface.
              Transfer the solvent to the separatory funnel and extract the
              sample by shaking the funnel for two minutes with periodic
              venting.  Allow the organic layer to separate from the water
              phase for a minimum of 10 minutes.  If the emulsion interface
              between layers is more than one-third the volume of the solvent
              layer, the Contractor shall employ mechanical techniques to
              complete the phase separation (i.e., glass stirring rod).
              Drain the methylene chloride extract into a 500-mL KD
              concentrator (mounted with a 10-mL concentrator tube) by
              passing the extract through a funnel packed with a glass wool
              plug and half-filled with anhydrous sodium sulfate.  Extract
              the water sample two more times using 60 mL of fresh methylene

                                   D-33                             DFLM01.0

-------
              chloride each time.   Drain each extract through the funnel into
              the KD concentrator.   After the third extraction,  rinse  the
              sodium sulfate with  at least 30 mL of fresh methylene  chloride.
              Concentrate this  extract as described in Section 9.6.

     9.5.3    A continuous liquid-liquid extractor may be used in place  of a
              separatory funnel when experience  with a sample from a given
              source indicates  that a serious emulsion problem will  result or
              an emulsion is encountered using a separatory funnel.  The
              following procedure  is used for a  continuous liquid-liquid
              extractor.

              Preextract the continuous liquid-liquid extractor for  three
              hours with methylene chloride and  reagent water.   Filter the
              sample as in Paragraph 9.5.1.  Allow the extractor to  cool,
              discard the methylene chloride, and add the filtered aqueous
              sample to the continuous liquid-liquid extractor.   Add 60  mL of
              methylene chloride to the sample bottle, seal and shake  for 30
              seconds.

              Transfer the solvent to the extractor.  Repeat the sample
              bottle rinse with an additional 50 to 100 mL portion of
              methylene chloride and add the rinse to the extractor.  Add 200
              to 500 mL methylene chloride to the distilling flask and
              sufficient reagent water to ensure proper operation.  Extract
              for 16 hours.  Allow to cool, then detach the flask and  dry the
              sample by running it through a rinsed funnel packed with a
              glass wool plug and 5 g of anhydrous sodium sulfate into a 500
              mL KD flask.  Proceed to Section 9.6.

     9.5.4    Combine the filtered particulate portion of the sample with the
              quartz sand in the extraction thimble.  Add the filter on top
              of the particulate/sand mixture, and place the thimble into a
              preextracted SDS apparatus.

              Add 200 to 250 mL of toluene to the SDS apparatus and reflux
              for 16 hours.  The solvent must cycle completely through the
              system 5-10 times per hour.  Concentrate this extract as
              described in Section 9.6.

     9.5.5    Determine the original sample volume by refilling the sample
              bottle to the mark and transferring the liquid to a 1-L
              graduated cylinder.  Record  the sample volume to the nearest 5
              mL.

      9.5.6    Prepare a sample aliquot for the duplicate sample analysis and
              a  sample aliquot for the spiked sample  analysis, using the
              procedures  in Sections 13 and  14 and  at the frequency given in
              those sections.

9.6  Macro-Concentration Procedures (All Matrices)

      Prior  to cleanup, extracts from all matrices must be concentrated to
      approximately 10 mL.  In addition, the concentrated extracts from the

                                   D-34                             DFLM01.0

-------
aqueous filtrate and the filtered particulates must be combined prior
to cleanup.  Two procedures may be used for macro-concentration,
Kuderna-Danish (K-D) or rotary evaporator.  Concentration of toluene by
K-D requires the use of a heating mantle, as toluene boils above the
temperature of a water bath.  The two procedures are described in
general terms below.

9.6.1   Concentration by K-D

        9.6.1.1    Add one or two clean boiling chips to the round
                   bottom flask from the SDS extractor or the reflux
                   flask.  Attach a three-ball macro Snyder column.

        9.6.1.2    Pre-wet the column by adding approximately 1 mL of
                   toluene through the top.  Place the round bottom
                   flask in a heating mantle and apply heat as required
                   to complete the concentration in 15-20 minutes.  At
                   the proper rate of distillation, the balls of the
                   column will actively chatter but the chambers will
                   not flood.

9.6.2   Concentration by Rotary Evaporator

        9.6.2.1    Assemble the rotary evaporator according to
                   manufacturer's instructions, and warm the water bath
                   to 45°C.  On a daily basis, preclean the rotary
                   evaporator by concentrating 100 mL of clean
                   extraction solvent through the system.  Archive both
                   the concentrated solvent and the solvent in the
                   catch flask for contamination check if necessary.
                   Between samples, three  2-3 mL aliquots of toluene
                   should be rinsed down the feed tube into a waste
                   beaker.

        9.6.2.2    Attach the round bottom flask containing the sample
                   extract to the rotary evaporator.  Slowly apply
                   vacuum to the system, and begin rotating the sample
                   flask.

        9.6.2.3    Lower the flask into  the water bath and adjust the
                   speed of rotation and the temperature as required to
                   complete the concentration in 15-20 minutes.  At the
                   proper rate of concentration, the flow of solvent
                   into the receiving flask will be steady, but no
                   bumping or visible boiling of the extract will
                   occur.

                   NOTE:    If the rate  of concentration is  too fast,
                            analyte loss may occur.

        9.6.2.4    When the liquid in the  concentration flask has
                   reached an apparent volume of 2 mL, remove  the flask
                   from the water bath,  and stop the rotation.  Slowly
                   and carefully, admit  air into the system.  Be sure

                             D-35                              DFLM01.0

-------
                   not to open the valve so quickly that the sample is
                   blown out of the flask.  Rinse the feed tube with
                   approximately 2 mL of hexane.

9.6.3   Extracts of Chemical Waste, Fly Ash, and Soil/Sediment Samples

        9.6.3.1    For chemical waste, fly ash, and soil/sediment
                   samples, the extract must be concentrated to
                   approximately 10 mL prior to acid-base washing
                   treatment.  Concentrate the extract by either of the
                   two procedures listed above.

        9.6.3.2    Transfer the concentrated extract to a 125 mL
                   separately funnel.  Rinse the flask with toluene and
                   add the rinse to the separatory funnel.  Proceed
                   with acid-base washing treatment per Section 9.7.

9.6.4   Extracts of Aqueous Filtrates

        9.6.4.1    Extracts of the aqueous filtrate of water samples
                   are in methylene chloride which is concentrated to
                   approximately 10 mL by K-D or rotary evaporator
                  . prior to combining with the toluene extract of the
                   particulates.  If using K-D, the methylene chloride
                   can be concentrated in a water bath instead of a
                   heating mantle.

        9.6.4.2    Combine the extract of the filtrate with the extract
                   of the particulates as described in Section 9.6.

9.6.5   Extracts of Particulates from Aqueous  Samples

        9.6.5.1    If the extract is  from the particulates from an
                   aqueous sample, it must be concentrated to
                   approximately 10 mL by either K-D or rotary
                   evaporator, and combined with the concentrated
                   extract of the filtrate  (Paragraph 9.6.4.1) prior  to
                   acid-base washing  treatment.

        9.6.5.2    Assemble a glass funnel  filled approximately one-
                   half full with sodium  sulfate such that the funnel
                   will drain into the K-D  concentrator or round bottom
                   flask from Paragraph 9.6.4.1 containing the
                   concentrated methylene chloride extract of the
                   filtrate.  (You may use  the  same funnel from
                   Paragraph 9.5.2 or 9.5.3.)   Pour the concentrated
                   toluene extract of the particulates through the
                   sodium  sulfate into the  K-D  concentrator or round
                   bottom  flask.  Rinse the flask from the particulate
                   extract with three 15-20 mL volumes of hexane, and
                   pour each rinse through  the  sodium sulfate into  the
                   K-D concentrator  or round bottom flask.
                             D-36
DFLM01.0

-------
               9.6.5.3    Concentrate the combined extract to approximately 10
                         mL (the volume of the toluene) by either K-D or
                         rotary evaporator.

               9.6.5.4    Transfer the concentrated combined extract to a 125
                         mL separatory funnel.  Rinse the concentrator with
                         three 5 mL volumes of hexane, and add each rinse to
                         the separatory funnel.  Proceed with acid-base
                         washing treatment per Section 9.7.

9.7   Extract Cleanup Procedures (All Matrices)

      9.7.1    Prior  to. cleanup, all extracts  are spiked with the 37Cl4-2378-
               TCDD cleanup standard (Section  5.17).  The recovery of this
               standard is used to monitor the efficiency of the cleanup
               procedures.  Spike 5 uL of the  cleanup standard (or a larger
               volume of diluted solution containing 25 ng of 37Cl4-2378-TCDD)
               into each separatory funnel containing an extract, resulting in
               a concentration of 0.25 ng/uL in the final extract analyzed by
               GC/MS.

      9.7.2    Partition the concentrated extract against 40 mL of
               concentrated sulfuric acid.  Shake for two minutes.  Remove and
               discard  the acid layer (bottom).  Repeat the acid washing until
               no  color is visible in the acid layer.   (Perform acid washings
               a maximum of four times.)

               CAUTION:   Concentrated sulfuric acid is hazardous and should
                         be handled with care.

      9.7.3    Partition the concentrated extract against 40 mL of 5 percent
               (w/v)  sodium chloride.  Shake for two minutes.  Remove and
               discard  the aqueous layer (bottom).

      9.7.4    Partition the concentrated extract against 40 mL of 20 percent
               (w/v)  potassium hydroxide (KOH).  Shake  for two minutes.
               Remove and discard the base layer (bottom).  Repeat the base
               washes until color is not visible in the bottom layer  (perform
               base washes a maximum of four times).   Strong base  (KOH) is
               known  to degrade certain PCDDs/PCDFs; therefore, contact time
               should be minimized.

      9.7.5    Partition the concentrated extract against 40 mL of 5 percent
               (w/v)  sodium chloride.  Shake for two minutes.  Remove  and
               discard  the aqueous layer (bottom).  Dry the organic layer by
               pouring  it through a funnel containing  a rinsed filter  half-
               filled with anhydrous sodium sulfate.   Collect the extract in
               an  appropriate size  (100-250 mL) round bottom flask.  Wash the
               separatory funnel with two 15-mL portions  of hexane, pour
               through  the funnel and combine  the extracts.  Concentrate the
               extracts to 1.0 mL using the procedures  described in Section
               9.8.
                                   D-37                              DFLM01.0

-------
9.8   Micro-Concentration of Extracts

      Prior to column Chromatographic cleanup procedures,  the extracts from
      all matrices must be concentrated to approximately 1.0 mL.   This
      concentration may be accomplished using either K-D or rotary
      evaporator, followed by nitrogen evaporation.

      9.8.1   Concentrate the extracts to approximately 1 mL, using the
              procedures in Paragraph 9.6.1 or 9.6.2.

      9.8.2   When  the  liquid in the concentration flask has reached an
              apparent  volume of 1 mL, transfer the extract to a conical
              centrifuge tube using three 2-3 mL rinses of hexane.

      9.8.3   Transfer  the centrifuge tube containing the sample extract to a
              nitrogen  evaporation device.  Adjust the flow of nitrogen so
              that  the  surface of the solvent is just visibly disturbed.

              NOTE:    A large vortex in the  solvent may cause  analyte loss.

      9.8.4   Lower the tube  into a 45*C water bath and continue
              concentrating.  When the volume of the liquid is approximately
              100 uL, add 2-3 mL of the hexane and continue concentration to
              a  final volume  of 1.0 mL.  Proceed with column chromatography
              as described in Section 9.9.

9.9   Silica Gel and Alumina Column Chromatographic Procedure

      9.9.1   Column 1. Insert a glass wool plug onto the bottom  of a
              gravity column  (1 cm x 30 cm glass column) fitted with a Teflon
              stopcock. Add  1 g silica gel and tap the column gently to
              settle the silica gel.  Add 2 g sodium hydroxide-impregnated
              silica gel, 1 g silica gel, 4 g sulfuric acid-impregnated
              silica gel, and 2 g silica gel  (see Section  5.10).   Tap the
              column gently after each addition.  A small positive pressure
               (5 psi) of clean nitrogen may be used if needed.

      9.9.2   Column 2. Insert a glass wool plug onto  the bottom  of a
              gravity column  (1 cm x 30 cm glass column) fitted with a Teflon
              stopcock. Add  6 g of  the activated acid  alumina  (see Paragraph
              5.10.1).  Tap the top  of the column gently.

              Check each new  batch of silica  gel and alumina and maintain  the
              results  of  the  analyses on  file for examination  during  EPA on-
              site  evaluations.  To  accomplish this, combine 50 uL of the
              continuing  calibration solution (CC3) with 950 uL of hexane.
              Process  this  solution  through both columns in the same manner
              as a  sample  extract  (Paragraphs 9.9.3  through 9.9.9).
              Concentrate  the continuing  calibration solution  to  a final
              volume of 50 uL.  Proceed to Section  10.   If the recovery of
              any of the  analytes  is  less  than 80%,  the batch  of  alumina or
               silica gel must not be used.
                                   D-38                              DFLM01.0

-------
      9.9.3   Add hexane to each column until the packing is free of air
              bubbles.  A small positive pressure (5 psi) of clean dry
              nitrogen may be used if needed.  Check the columns for
              channeling.  If channeling is present, discard the column.

              CAUTION:  Do not tap a wetted column.

      9.9.4   Assemble the two columns such that the eluate from Column 1
              (silica gel) drains directly into Column 2 (alumina).

      9.9.5   Apply the hexane solution from Paragraph 9.8.4 to the top of
              the silica gel column.  Rinse the vial with enough hexane (1-2
              mL) to complete the quantitative transfer of the sample to the
              surface of the silica.

      9.9.6   Using 90 mL of hexane, elute the extract from Column 1 directly
              onto Column 2 which contains the alumina.

              CAUTION:  Do not allow the alumina column to run dry.

      9.9.7   Add 20 mL of hexane to Column 2, and elute until the hexane
              level is just below the top of the alumina.  Do not discard the
              eluted hexane, but collect in a separate flask and store it for
              later use, as it may be useful in determining where the labeled
              analytes are being lost if recoveries are less than 50 percent.

      9.9.8   Add 20 mL of 20% methylene chloride/80% hexane (v/v) to Column
              2 and collect the eluate.

      9.9.9   Concentrate the extract to approximately 2 to 3 mL using the
              procedures in Section 9.8.

              CAUTION:   Do not concentrate the eluate to dryness.   The
                         sample is now ready to be transferred to the carbon
                         column.

9.10  Carbon Column Chromatographic Procedure

      9.10.1  Thoroughly mix 5.35 g active carbon AX-21 and 62.0 g Celite 545
              to produce a 7.9% w/w mixture.  Activate the mixture at 130°C
              for six hours, and store in a desiccator.

              Check each new batch of the Carbon/Celite and maintain the
              results from the analyses for examination during EPA on-site
              evaluations.  To accomplish this, add 50 uL of the continuing
              calibration solution to 950 uL of hexane.  Process the spiked
              solution in the same manner as a sample extract (Paragraphs
              9.10.2 through 9.10.6).  Concentrate the continuing calibration
              solution to 50 uL and proceed with Section 9.10.  If the
              recovery of any of the analytes is less than 80%, this batch of
              Carbon/Celite mixture may not be used.

      9.10.2  Prepare a 4-inch glass column by cutting off each end of a 10-
              mL disposable serological pipet.  Fire polish both ends and

                                   D-39                             DFLM01.0

-------
              flare if desired.  Insert a glass wool plug at one end of the
              column, and pack it with 1 g of the Carbon/Celite mixture.
              Insert an additional glass wool plug in the other end.

              CAUTION:   It is very important that the column be packed
                         properly to ensure that carbon fines are not carried
                         into the eluate.   PCDDs/PCDFs will adhere to the
                         carbon fines and greatly reduce recovery.   If carbon
                         fines are carried into the eluate in Paragraph
                         9.10.5,  filter the eluate using a 0.45 micron filter
                         (pre-rinsed with toluene), then proceed to Section
                         9.11.

      9.10.3   Rinse the column with:

              9.10.3.1   4 mL Toluene.

              9.10.3.2   2 mL of Methylene Chloride/Methanol/Toluene (75:20:5
                         v/v).

              9.10.3.3   4 mL of Cyclohexane/Methylene Chloride (50:50 v/v).

              Discard all the column rinsates.

      9.10.4   While the column is still wet, transfer the concentrated eluate
              from Paragraph 9.9.9 to the prepared carbon column.  Rinse the
              eluate container with two 0.5 mL portions of hexane and
              transfer the rinses to the AX-21 carbon column.  Elute the
              column with the following sequence of solvents.

              9.10.4.1   10 mL of Cyclohexane/Methylene Chloride (50:50 v/v).

              9.10.4.2   5 mL of Methylene Chloride/Methanol/Toluene (75:20:5
                         v/v).

              NOTE:  The  above two eluates may be  collected, combined and
                     used as  a check on column efficiency.

      9.10.5   Once the solvents have eluted through the column, turn the
              column over, elute the PCDD/PCDF fraction with 20 mL of
              toluene, and collect the eluate.

9.11  Final Concentration

      9.11.1  Evaporate the toluene fraction from  Paragraph 9.10.5 to
              approximately 1.0 mL in a rotary evaporator  (see Section 9.8).
              Transfer the extract to a 2.0 mL conical vial using a toluene
              rinse.

              CAUTION:  Do not evaporate  the sample extract to dryness.

      9.11.2  Add  100 uL  tridecane  (or nonane) to  the extract and reduce the
              volume to 100 uL using a gentle stream  of clean dry nitrogen.
                                   D-40                              DFLM01.0

-------
              The final extract volume should be 100 uL of tridecane (or
              nonane).  Seal the vial and store the sample extract in the
              dark at ambient temperature until just prior to GC/MS analysis.

10.   GC/MS Analysis

10.1  Remove the extract of the sample or blank from storage.   Gently swirl
      the solvent on the lower portion of the vial to ensure  complete
      dissolution of the PCDDs/PCDFs.

10.2  Transfer a 50 uL aliquot of the extract to a 0.3 mL vial,  and add
      sufficient recovery standard solution to yield a concentration of 0.5
      ng/uL in a 50 uL volume.   Reduce the volume of the extract back down to
      50 uL using a gentle stream of dry nitrogen.

      Inject a 2 uL aliquot of the extract into the GC/MS instrument (see
      Paragraph 4.1.1).   Reseal the vial from Paragraph 9.11.2,  containing
      the original concentrated extract.

10.3  Analyze the extract by GC/MS, and monitor all of the ions listed in
      Table 7.  The same MS parameters used to analyze the calibration
      solutions shall be used for the sample extracts.

10.4  Dilutions

      10.4.1  If the concentration of any PCDD/PCDF in the sample has
              exceeded the calibration range or the detector has been
              saturated, a dilution  shall be performed.

              An appropriate dilution will result  in the largest peak in the
              diluted sample falling between the mid-point and high-point of
              the calibration range.

      10.4.2  Dilutions are performed using an aliquot of the original
              extract, of which approximately 50 uL remain from Paragraph
              9.11.2.  Remove an appropriate size  aliquot from the vial and
              add it to a sufficient volume of tridecane (or nonane) in a
              clean 0.3 mL conical vial.  Add sufficient recovery standard
              solution to yield a  concentration of 0.5 ng/uL (1.0 ng/uL   C-
              OCDD).  Reduce the volume of the extract back down to 50 uL
              using a gentle stream  of dry nitrogen.

      10.4.3  The dilution factor  is defined as the total volume of the
              sample aliquot and clean solvent divided by the volume of the
              sample aliquot that  was diluted.

      10.4.4  Inject 2 uL of the diluted sample extract into the GC/MS, and
              analyze according to Section 10.3.

      10.4.5  Diluted samples in which the MS response of any internal
              standard is > 10% of the MS response of that internal standard
              in the most recent continuing calibration standard are
              quantified using the internal standards.
                                   D-41                   '          DFLM01.0

-------
              Diluted samples  in which the MS response of any internal
              standard is < 10% of the MS response of that internal  standard
              in the most recent continuing calibration standard are
              quantified using the recovery standards (see Section 15.3).

11.   Identification Criteria

      For a gas  chromatographic peak to be unambiguously identified as a FCDD
      or PCDF,  it must meet all of the following criteria.

11.1  Retention Times

      Retention times are required for all chromatograms;  scan numbers are
      optional.   Retention times shall either be printed at the apex of each
      peak on the chromatogram, or each peak shall be unambiguously labeled
      with an identifier that refers to the quantitation report.   The
      chromatogram, the quantitation report,  or a combination of both shall
      contain the retention time of each peak and its area.

      11.1.1  In order to make a positive identification of the 2,3,7,8-
              substituted isomers for which an isotopically labeled internal
              or recovery standard is present in the sample extract, the
              absolute retention time (RT) at the maximum peak height of the
              analyte must be  within -1 to 3 seconds of the retention time of
              the  corresponding labeled standard.

      11.1.2  In order to make a positive identification of the 2,3,7,8-
              substituted isomers for which a labeled standard is not
              available, the relative retention time (RRT) of the analyte
              must be within 0.05 RRT units of the RRT established by the
              continuing calibration.  The RRT is calculated as follows:

                             retention time of analyte
              RRT	
                    retention time of corresponding internal standard

      11.1.3  For non-2,3,7,8-substituted compounds (tetra through hepta),
              the retention time must be within the retention time windows
              established by the window defining mix for the corresponding
              homologue (see Section 7.1).

      11.1.4  In order to assure that retention time shifts do not adversely
              affect  the identification of PCDDs/PCDFs, the absolute
              retention times of the two recovery standards added to every
              sample  extract immediately prior to analysis may not shift by
              more  than + 10 seconds from their retention times in the
              continuing calibration standard (see Paragraph 17.1.4).

11.2  Peak Identification

      All of the specified ions listed in Table 5 for each PCDD/PCDF
      homologue and labeled standards must be present in the SICP.  The ion
      current response for the two quantitation ions and the M-[COC1]+ ions
                                   D-42                              DFLM01.0

-------
      for the analytes must maximize simultaneously (+ 2 seconds).   This
      requirement also applies to the internal standards and recovery
      standards.   For the cleanup standard,  only one ion is monitored.

11.3  Signal-To-Noise Ratio

      The integrated ion current for each analyte ion listed in Table 5 must
      be at least 2.5 times background noise and must not have saturated the
      detector.   The internal standard ions  must be at least 10.0  times
      background noise and must not have saturated the detector.   However,  if
      the M-[COC1]+ ion does not meet the 2.5 times S/N requirement but
      meets all  the other criteria listed in Section 11 and,  in the judgement
      of the GC/MS Interpretation Specialist the peak is a PCDD/PCDF, the
      peak may be reported as positive and the data flagged on Form I.   See
      the instructions in Exhibit B for Form I.

11.4  Ion Abundance Ratios

      The relative ion abundance criteria listed in Table 6 for native
      analytes and internal standards must be met using peak areas to
      calculate  ratios.

      11.4.1  If  interferences are present and ion abundance ratios  are not
              met using peaks areas, but all other qualitative identification
              criteria are met (RT, S/N, presence of all three ions), then
     • •        the Contractor may use peak heights to evaluate the ion ratio.

      11.4.2  If, in  the judgement of the GC/MS Interpretation Specialist the
              peak is a PCDD/PCDF, then report the ion abundance ratios
              determined using peak heights, quantitate the peaks using peak
              heights rather than areas for both the target analyte  and the
              internal standard, and flag the data on Form I.

11.5  Polychlorinated Diphenyl Ether (PCDPE) Interferences

      The identification of a GC peak as a PCDF cannot be made if a signal
      having S/N greater than 2.5 is detected at the same retention time (• 2
      seconds) in the corresponding PCDPE channel (see Table 5).   If a PCDPE
      is detected, it shall be documented in the SDG Narrative,  and an
      Estimated  Maximum Possible Concentration (EMPC) shall be calculated for
      this GC peak according to Section 15.7, regardless of the ion abundance
      ratio, and reported on Form I.

12.   Method Blanks

12.1  A minimum  of one blank per matrix shall be analyzed with each SDG.  If
      samples of the same matrix are extracted in different episodes (i.e.,
      different  shifts or days),  one blank per matrix must be prepared for
      each episode.   When water samples in a SDG are extracted using both the
      separatory funnel and continuous liquid-liquid extraction procedures,
      at least one blank must be prepared by each procedure.
                                                                    DFLM01.0

-------
12.2  Method Blank Criteria

      12.2.1  Acceptable laboratory method blanks must not contain any
              chemical interference or electronic noise at the m/z of the
              specified unlabeled PCDD/PCDF ions that is greater than 5
              percent of the signal of the appropriate internal standard
              quantitation ion.

      12.2.2  A peak that meets identification criteria as a PCDD/PCDF in the
              method blank must not exceed 2 percent of the signal of the
              appropriate internal standard.

      12.2.3  If the method blank extracted along with a group of samples is
              contaminated per Paragraph 12.2.1 or 12.2.2, then the
              associated positive samples and any samples containing peaks
              that do not meet all of the identification criteria in Section
              11 must be rerun.

      12.2.4  If all the criteria listed above are not met, check solvents,
              reagents, apparatus and glassware to locate and eliminate the
              source of contamination before any more samples are extracted
              and before any positive samples are reextracted.

      12.2.5  Test each new lot of reagents or solvents by using them to
              prepare a method blank and analyze it according the procedures
              in this exhibit.  If new lots of reagents or solvents contain
              interfering contaminants, purify or discard them.  Maintain
              records of all such blanks on file for examination during EPA
              on-site evaluations.

13.   Spiked Sample Analysis

      In order to provide data on the accuracy of the analytical method,  the
      laboratory is required to prepare and analyze a spiked sample for each
      matrix being analyzed.  For each SDG,  the laboratory must prepare a
      spiked sample for all of the following matrix types that occur in the
      SDG:

          o  Water
          o  Soil/Sediment

          o  Chemical Waste

          o  Fly Ash

      If a matrix is not represented in a SDG, then no spiked sample is
      required for that matrix.  If the Region or samplers have identified a
      particular sample to be used for the spike, the laboratory must use an
      aliquot of that sample.  If the Region or samplers have not identified
      a specific sample for spiking, then the laboratory may choose a sample
      from the SDG; however, the sample chosen must not be a sample
      identified by the Region as a field or trip blank.
                                   D-44                              DFLM01.0

-------
13.1  Prepare the spiked sample aliquot by taking the same weight (or volume)
      of the representative matrix as is indicated in Sections 9.1 to 9.5 and
      placing it in a clean container of suitable size.

13.2  Add 1.0 mL of the spiking solution in Section 5.18 and Table 11 to the
      aliquot.  Manually mix the sample to distribute the spiking solution,
      and let the aliquot equilibrate for one hour.

13.3  Prepare and extract the spiked sample aliquot in the same fashion as is
      used for field samples, and carry the aliquot through the entire
      analytical procedure including cleanup.

13.4  Calculate the concentration of each analyte according to the procedures
      in Section 15.

13.5  Calculate the recovery of each spiked analyte, using the following
      equation:

                       Amount  found  - Amount  in unspiked sample   x  J_QQ
              ^•spike ~         Amount spiked

              where the recovery  (R) is expressed  as a percentage

13.6  The recovery of each spiked analyte must be in the range of 50-150
      percent.  If the recovery of any analyte falls outside this range, the
      laboratory must recheck all calculations, and confirm that the spiking
      solutions were added and were at the correct concentrations, but no
      further action is necessary by the laboratory at this time.  Recovery
      limits for these analytes will be developed at a later date.

14.   Duplicate Sample Analysis

      In order to provide data on the precision of the analytical method, the
      laboratory is required to prepare and analyze a duplicate of one sample
      for each matrix being analyzed.  For each SDG, the laboratory must
      prepare a duplicate sample for all of the following matrix types that
      occur in the SDG:

          o  Water

          o  Soil/Sediment

          o  Chemical Waste
          o  Fly Ash

      If a matrix is not represented in a SDG, then no duplicate sample is
      required for that matrix.  If the Region or samplers have identified a
      particular sample to be used for the duplicate, the laboratory must use
      an aliquot of that sample.  If the Region or samplers have not
      identified a specific sample for use as the duplicate, then the
      laboratory may choose a sample from the SDG; however, the sample chosen
      must not be a sample identified by the Region as a field or trip blank.
                                   D-45                              DFLM01.0

-------
14.1  Prepare the duplicate sample aliquot by taking the same weight (or
      volume) of the representative matrix as is indicated in Sections 9.1 to
      9.5 and carrying it through the entire analytical procedure including
      extraction, cleanup and analysis.

14.2  Calculate the concentration of each analyte detected in the duplicate
      sample according the procedures in Section 15.

14.3  Calculate the precision of each detected analyte in the original and
      duplicate analyses, expressed as the Relative Percent Difference (RPD),
      according to the following equation:

                     |  Sample Result  - Duplicate Result   |   x IQO
              RPD -   (Sample Result + Duplicate Result)/2

14.4  The RPD of any detected analyte must be less than or equal to 50
      percent.  If the RPD of any detected analyte falls above this limit,
      the laboratory must recheck all calculations, but no further action is
      necessary by the laboratory at this time.  RPD limits for these
      analytes will be developed at a later date.

15.   Calculations

15.1  For GC peaks that have met all the identification criteria outlined in
      Section 11, calculate the concentration of the individual PCDD or PCDF
      isomers using the following formulae:

              ALL MATRICES OTHER THAN WATER

                                   Qis x (An1  + An2)
                    Cn (ugAg)	^	2	
                                W x (Aisx  + Ais  ) x RRFn

               WATER

                                            " +  An2)
               Where:

               .  1
                                 V x (Ais1 + Ais  )  x RRFn
                   and An    -  integrated ion abundances  (peak  areas)  of the
                                quantitation ions of  the isomer  of interest
                                (Table  5).

                           2
                    an^ Ais  ""  integrated ion abundances  (peak  areas)  of the
                                quantitation ions of  the appropriate internal
                                standard (Table  5).

               NOTE: In instances where peak heights  are used to evaluate ion
                       abundance ratios due to interferences  (see Section
                       11.4), substitute peak heights for areas in  the
                       formulae above.
                                   D-46                              DFLM01.0

-------
              W    -   weight of sample  extracted,  in  grams.

              V    —   volume of sample  extracted,  in  liters.
              Q^s  —   quantity (ng)  of  the appropriate  internal  standard
                       added to the  sample prior  to extraction.

              RRFn -   calculated relative response factor  from continuing
                       calibration (see  Section 7.3).

      For solids matrices,  the units of ng/g  that result from the formula
      above are equivalent to ug/Kg.   Using isotope dilution techniques for
      quantitation,  the concentration data are recovery  corrected,  and
      therefore, the volume of the final extract  and the injection volume  are
      implicit in the value of Q£S.

      15.1.1  For homologues  that contain only one 2,3,7,8-substituted isomer
               (TCDD, PeCDD, HpCDD and TCDF),  the RRF of the 2,3,7,8-
              substituted  isomer from the continuing calibration (see
              Paragraph 7.3.2.3) will be used to quantitate both the 2,3,7,8-
              substituted  isomers and the non-2,3,7,8-substituted isomers.

      15.1.2  For homologues  that contain more than one 2,3,7,8-substituted
              isomer (HxCDD,  PeCDF, HxCDF and HpCDF), the RRF used to
              calculate the concentration of each  2,3,7,8-substituted isomers
              will be  the  RRF determined for that  isomer during the
              continuing calibration  (see Paragraph 7.3.2.3).

      15.1.3  For homologues  that contain one or more non-2.3.7.8-substituted
              isomers, the RRF used to  calculate the concentration of these
              isomers  will be the lowest of the RRFs determined during the
              continuing calibration  (see Paragraph 7.3.2.3) for the 2,3,7,8-
              substituted  isomers in that homologue.  This RRF will yield the
              highest  possible concentration for the non-2,3,7,8-substituted
              isomers.

              NOTE:  The  relative response factors of given  isomers within
                      any homologue may  be different.  However, for the
                     purposes of these  calculations,  it will be  assumed that
                      every non-2,3,7,8-substituted isomer  for a  given
                     homologue has  the  same relative  response factor.  In
                      order to minimize  the effect  of  this  assumption on risk
                      assessment,  the  2,3,7,8-substituted isomer  with the
                      lowest RRF was  chosen as representative of  each
                     homologue. All  relative response  factor calculations
                      for  the non-2378-substituted  isomers  in a given
                     homologue are based on that isomer.

15.2  In addition to the concentrations of specific isomers,  the total
      homologue concentrations are also reported.  Calculate the total
      concentration of each homologue of PCDDs/PCDFs as  follows:

          Total concentration -     sum of the concentrations of every
                                    positively identified isomer of each
                                    PCDD/PCDF homologue.
                                   D-47                              DFLM01.0

-------
      The total must include the non-2,3,7,8-substituted isomers as well as
      the 2,3,7,8-substituted isomers that are also reported separately.  The
      total number of GC peaks included in the' total homologue concentration
      must be specified (see Exhibit B).

15.3  If the area of any internal standard in a diluted sample is less than
      10 percent of the area of that internal standard in the continuing
      calibration standard, then the unlabeled PCDD/PCDF concentrations in
      the sample shall be estimated using the recovery standard, using the
      formulae that follow.  The purpose is to ensure that there is an
      adequate MS response for quantitation in a diluted sample.  While use
      of a smaller aliquot of the sample might require smaller dilutions and
      therefore yield a larger area for the internal standard in the diluted
      extract, this practice leads to other concerns about the homogeneity of
      the sample and the representativeness of the aliquot taken for
      extraction.

              ALL MATRICES OTHER THAN WATER


                    Cn  <"J


              WATER


                    Cn
                                W x (Aj-s1 + Ars2) x RRFrs
                                V x (Ays1 + Ars2) x RRFrs

              D - dilution factor (see Paragraph 10.4.3).

              An1, An2, Arsl, Ars2, Qrs, RRFrs, W and V
              are defined in Paragraphs 7.3.3 and 7.3.4 and Section 15.1.

15.4  Report results for soil/sediment,  fly ash,  and chemical waste samples
      in micrograms per kilograms (ug/kg)  and water samples in nanograms per
      liter (ng/L), as described in Exhibit B.

15.5  Calculate the percent recovery for each internal standard and the
      cleanup standard in the sample extract,  Ris,  using the formula:
                                 Ais2) x Qrs
                                                 x  100%
                         1 + Ars2) x RRFis x Qis

                         , Ars1. Ars2, Qis, Qrs a
               are  defined in Paragraph 7.3.3 and Section 15.1.

               When calculating the recovery of the 37Cl4-2378-
               standard,  only one m/z is monitored for  this standard;
                                   D-48                              DFLM01.0

-------
              therefore, only one peak area will be used in the numerator of
              this formula.  Use both peak areas of the 13C12-1234-TCDD
              recovery standard in the denominator.

      15.5.1  The 13C12-1234-TCDD is used to quantitate the tetra internal
              standards and the cleanup standard, and 13Ci2-123789-HxCDD is
              used to quantitate the HxCDD, HpCDF and OCDD internal standards
              (see Table 8).

      15.5.2  If the original sample, prior to any dilutions, has any
              internal standard with a percent recovery of less than 25% or
              greater than 150%, reextraction and reanalysis of that sample
              is required (see Section 17).

15.6  Sample Specific Estimated Detection Limit

      The sample specific Estimated Detection Limit (EDL)  is  the estimate
      made by the laboratory of the concentration of a given  analyte required
      to produce a signal with a peak height of at least 2.5  times the
      background signal level.  The estimate is specific to a particular
      analysis of the sample and will be affected by sample size,  dilution,
      etc.

      An EDL is calculated for each 2,3,7,8-substituted isomer that is not
      identified, regardless of whether or not non-2,3,7,8-substituted
      isomers in that homologue are present.  The EDL is also calculated for
      2,3,7,8-substituted isomers giving responses for both the quantitation
      ions that are less than 2.5 times the background level.

      Use the formulae below to calculate an EDL for each absent 2,3,7,8-
      substituted PCDD/PCDF.  The background level (Hx)  is determined by
      measuring the height of the noise at the expected retention times of
      both the quantitation ions of the particular 2,3,7,8-substituted
      isomer.  The expected retention time is determined from the most recent
      analysis of the CCS standard on the same GC/MS system.

              ALL MATRICES OTHER THAN WATER

                                  2.5 x Qis x  (Hx1 + Hx2) x  D
                   EDL  (ugAg)	i?	
                                  W x  (His1 + His2) x
              WATER
                                  2.5 x Qis x  (Hx1 + Hx2) x D
                    EDL (ng/L)	1S     X     X
                                  V x  (His1 + His2) x
              Where:
                 12                    '
              Hx  and Hx  -      Peak heights of  the noise  for
                                 both of the  quantitation ions  of  the
                                 2,3,7,8-substituted isomer of
                                 interest.
                                   D-49                              DFLM01.0

-------
                 1       2
              His and H£S  -    Peak heights of both the quantitation
                                ions of the appropriate internal
                                standards.

              D - dilution factor (see Paragraph 10.4.3).

              Qis, RRFn, W and V are defined in Paragraph 7.3.3 and Section
              15.1.

15.7  Estimated Maximum Possible Concentration

      An estimated maximum possible concentration (EMPC) is calculated for
      2,3,7,8-substituted isomers that are characterized by a response with a
      S/N of at least 2.5 for both the quantitation ions,  but that do not
      meet all the identification criteria in Section 11.

      Calculate the EMPC according to the following formulae:

              ALL MATRICES OTHER THAN WATER
                    EMPC  (ug/L) -
               WATER
                    EMPC (ng/L)
                                     (Ax1 + Ax2) x Qis x D
                                       + Ais2)  x RRFn x W
                                     (A,,1 + Ax2)  x Qis  x D
                                          Ais2)
               Where:
                 1        2
               AX  and AX  - areas of both quantitation ions.

               Aig1,  Ais2« °-is'  RR*1'  D'  w> and v are defined in Paragraph
               7.3.3  and 10.4.3  and Section 15.1.

15.8  Toxicity Equivalency Factor (TEF) Calculation

      The 2378-TCDD  toxicity equivalence  of PCDDs/PCDFs present in the  sample
      is calculated  according to  the method recommended by  the  Chlorinated
      Dioxins  Workgroup  (CDWG)  of the EPA and the  Centers for Disease Control
      (CDC).   This method assigns a  2378-TCDD toxicity equivalency factor
      (TEF)  to each  of the 17 2,3,7,8-substituted  PCDDs/PCDFs shown in  Table
      11  ("Update  of Toxicity Equivalency Factors  (TEFs)  for Estimating Risks
      Associated with Exposures to Mixtures of Chlorinated  Dibenzo-p-Dioxins
      and Dibenzofurans  (CDDs/CDFs)" March 1989 (EPA 625/3-89/016)).  The
      2378-TCDD  toxicity equivalence of the PCDDs/PCDFs present in the  sample
      is calculated  by summing  the product of the  TEF and the concentration
      for each of  the compounds listed  in Table 11.

                                   D-50                             DFLM01.0

-------
      The exclusion of homologues such as mono-,  di-,  tri-  and the non-
      2,3 ,7,8-substituted isomers in the higher homologues  does not mean that
      they are not toxic.   Their toxicity,  as estimated at  this time,  is much
      less than the toxicity of the compounds listed in Table  11.   Hence,
      only the 2,3,7,8-substituted isomers are included in  the TEF
      calculations.  The procedure for calculating the 2378-TCDD toxic
      equivalence cited above is not claimed by the CDWG to be based on  a
      thoroughly established scientific foundation.  Rather, the procedure
      represents a "Consensus Recommendation on Science Policy."

      When calculating the 2378-TCDD toxicity equivalence of a sample, the
      Contractor shall include only those 2,3,7,8-substituted  isomers that
      were detected in the sample and met all of  the qualitative
      identification criteria in Section 11.  Do  not include EMPC or EDL
      values in the TEF calculations.  Further instructions regarding the
      calculation of the 2378-TCDD toxicity equivalence may be found in
      Exhibit B.

      The 2378-TCDD toxicity equivalence of a sample is used in Sections 16
      and 17 of this procedure to determine when  second column confirmation
      or reextractions and reanalyses may be required.

16.   Isomer Specificity

      Isomer specificity for all 2,3,7,8-substituted PCDDs/PCDFs cannot  be
      achieved on the 60 m DB-5 column alone.  Historically, problems have
      been associated with the separation of 2378-TCDD from 1237-TCDD and
      1268-TCDD, and separation of 2378-TCDF from 2347-TCDF.   Because of the
      toxicologic concern associated with 2378-TCDD and 2378-TCDF, additional
      analyses may be required for some samples,  as described  below.

16.1  If the toxicity equivalence calculated in Section 15  is  greater than
      0.7 ppb (soil/sediment or fly ash), 7 ppb (chemical waste),  or 7 ppt
      (aqueous), better isomer specificity is required than can be achieved
      on the DB-5 column.  The Contractor may utilize either of the two
      options listed below to achieve adequate isomer specificity.

      16.1.1  The  sample extract may be  reanalyzed on a 60 m SP-2330 or SP-
              2331  (or  equivalent) GC  column in order to achieve better GC
              resolution, and  therefore, better identification and
              quantitation of  the  individual  2,3,7,8-substituted  isomers.

      16.1.2  The  sample extract may be  analyzed on a single GC column
              capable of resolving all 2,3,7,8-substituted PCDDs/PCDFs from
              other isomers, but not necessarily resolving all the  non-
              2,3, 7, 8 -substituted  isomers  from one another.

      Regardless of GC column used, for a gas chromatographic  peak to be
      identified as a 2,3,7,8-substituted PCDD/PCDF isomer, it must meet the
      ion abundance, -signal-to-noise, and retention time criteria listed in
      Section 11.   In addition, when using any GC column other than those
      specified here (DB-5,  SP-2330 or SP-2331),  the Contractor shall clearly
      document, in the SDG Narrative, the elution order of  all the analytes
      of interest on any such column.

                                   D-51                              DFLM01.0

-------
16.2  For any sample analyzed on a DB-5 (or equivalent) column in which
      either 2378-TCDD or 2378-TCDF is reported as an EMPC,  regardless of
      TEF-adjusted concentration or matrix, analysis of the extract is
      required on a second GC column which provides better specificity for
      these two isomers.

17.    Required Sample Reruns

      Due to a. variety of situations that may occur during contract
      performance, the laboratory shall be required to reextract and
      reanalyze certain samples or groups of samples.   Except in the case of
      dilutions, the term "rerun" shall indicate sample reextraction, cleanup
      and reanalysis.  When dilutions are required, the original extract
      shall be diluted and reanalyzed.

      When the rerun is required due to matrix effects, interferences, or
      other problems encountered, the Government will pay the Contractor for
      the reruns.  Such reruns shall be billable and accountable under the
      specified contract allotment of automatic reruns.  When the rerun is
      required due to Contractor materials, equipment or instrumentation
      problems, or lack of Contractor adherence to specified contract
      procedures, the rerun shall not be billable nor accountable under the
      terms of this contract.

17.1  The following sample reruns may be billable as such under the contract,
      as defined below.

      17.1.1   If  the original sample has  a percent recovery of  any internal
               standard or the cleanup standard outside of  the range of 25-150
               percent,  then reextraction  and reanalysis are required.

               NOTE:   This rerun is billable only if the Contractor can
                      demonstrate that the internal standards or cleanup
                      standard were added to the original sample in accordance
                      with contract specifications, and that the same
                      standards are out of criteria in the reextraction and
                      reanalysis.

      17.1.2   If the internal standards are not present with at least a 10/1
               S/N ratio at their respective m/z's (316, 318,  332,  334, 402,
               404,  420, 422,  470 and 472), then reextraction and reanalysis
               are required.   If the  'C14-2378-TCDD is not present with at
               least a 10/1 S/N ratio at m/z 328,  then reextraction and
               reanalysis are required.

               NOTE:   This rerun is billable only if the Contractor can
                      demonstrate that the internal standards or cleanup
                      standard were added to the original sample in accordance
                      with contract specifications, and that the same
                      standards are out of criteria- in the reextraction and
                      reanalysis.

      17.1.3   If any of the internal standard ion abundance ratios as
               specified in Table 6 are outside the contract specified control

                                    D-52                             DFLM01.0

-------
               limits, the Contractor must reanalyze the sample extract on a
               second GC column with different elution characteristics, as
               discussed in Section 16.  No reextraction is required for such
               an analysis.  This reanalysis is only billable if the same
               internal standard ion abundance ratios are outside the control
               limits on the second column, indicating matrix effects may have
               occurred.

      17.1.4   If the absolute retention time of either the 13Ci2-1234-TCDD or
                Ci2-123789-HxCDD recovery standard in a sample extract shifts
               by greater than 10 seconds from the retention time of that
               standard in the continuing calibration standard, then the
               sample extract must be reanalyzed after the Contractor has
               investigated the cause of the retention time shift and taken
               corrective action.  No reextraction is required for such an
               analysis.  This reanalysis is only billable if the same
               recovery standard retention time shifts by greater than 10
               seconds in the second analysis, indicating matrix effects may
               have occurred.

17.2  If the calculated concentration of the unlabeled PCDDs/PCDFs  exceeded
      the initial calibration range,  the sample  extract shall  be  diluted and
      reanalyzed (see Section 10.4).   Such sample  dilutions  are billable
      under the contract.

      NOTE:    Only one dilution shall be billable per sample and only as an
               additional analysis with no extraction.

17.3  The following sample reruns  shall be performed at the  Contractor's
      expense and shall not be billable under the  terms of the contract.

      17.3.1   All positive samples associated with a contaminated method
               blank and any samples which contain peaks that do not meet all
               of the qualitative identification criteria in Section 11
               associated with a contaminated method blank must be reextracted
               and reanalyzed.  Acceptable laboratory method blanks must not
               contain any chemical interference or electronic noise at the
               m/z of the specified unlabeled PCDD/PCDF ions that is greater
               than five percent of the signal of the appropriate internal
               standard quantitation ion.  A peak that meets identification
               criteria in the method blank must not exceed two percent of the
               signal of the appropriate internal standard.

      17.3.2   If the chromatographic peak separation between   C^2"2378-TCDD
               and 13Ci2-1234-TCDD is not resolved with a valley of < 25% on
               the DB-5 (or equivalent) column, or 2378-TCDD is not resolved
               from the closest eluting isomer with a valley of < 25% on the
               SP-2331  (or equivalent) column, then the Contractor shall
               adjust the GC/MS operating conditions and rerun the affected
               sample.  This criterion applies to sample analyses.  If this
               criterion is not met for a calibration standard, all associated
               samples must be rerun.
                                   D-53                              DFLM01.0

-------
      17.3.3  If a false positive is reported for a blind QC sample submitted
              by the Region, the Contractor shall reextract and reanalyze the
              entire SDG upon notification by SMO.

      17.3.4  If the analysis results for a blind QC sample do not fall
              within the acceptance windows established by EPA, the
              Contractor shall resxtract and reanalyze tt._ entire SDG upon
              notification by SMO.

17.4  A native spike and duplicate shall be performed for each group of
      samples reextracted and reanalyzed under Section 17.3.

      17.4.1  If a concurrent PCDD/PCDF SDG is being processed, the native
              spike and duplicate from that SDG may be shared with the rerun
              samples if the total number of samples does not exceed 20.  The
              native spike and duplicate data shall be reported in the data
              packages for both SDGs, but are only billable once, under the
              original SDG for which they were prepared.  If the total number
              of samples exceeds 20, an additional native spike and duplicate
              must be analyzed.

      17.4.2  If no other PCDD/PCDF SDG is being processed at the time of
              reanalysis, the native spike and duplicate shall be chosen from
              the SDG for which the rerun samples are required.  The native
              spike and duplicate analyses are only billable in instances
              where one or more of the associated rerun samples are also
              billable.
                                   D-54                          '    DFLM01.0

-------
TABLE 1.  SUGGESTED OPERATING CONDITIONS FOR A DB-5 (OR EQUIVALENT) COLUMN
              Stationary Phase
              Film Thickness
              Column Dimensions
              Helium Linear Velocity
              Initial Temperature
              Initial Time
              Temperature Program
              Hold Time
              Total Time
DB-5 (or equivalent)
0.25 urn
60 m x 0.32 mm
35 - 40 cm/sec at 240°C
170'C
10 minutes
increase to 320°C at 8'/minute
until OCDF elutes
40-45 minutes
                                 D-55
                           DFLM01.0

-------
   TABLE 2.  2378-TCDD TOXICITY EQUIVALENCY FACTORS (TEFs) FOR PCDDs/PCDFs
              Analvte                         TEF

              2378-TCDD                      1.00
              2378-TCDF                      0.10
              12378-PeCDF                    0.05
              12378-PeCDD                    0.50
              23478-PeCDF                    0.50
              123478-HxCDF                   0.10
              123678-HxCDF                   0.10
              123478-HxCDD                   0.10
              123678-HxCDD                   0.10
              123789-HxCDD                   0.10
              234678-HxCDF                   0.10
              1234678-HpCDF                  0.01
              1234678-HpCDD                  0.01
              1234789-HpCDF                  0.01
              OCDD                           0.001
              OCDF                           0.001
Reference:     "Update  of Toxicity Equivalency Factors  (TEFs) for Estimating
               Risks Associated with Exposures to Mixtures of Chlorinated
               Dibenzo-p-Dioxins and Dibenzofurans  (CDDs/CDFs)," March 1989,
               (EPA 625/3-89/016)
                                   D-56  '                            DFLM01.0

-------
                TABLE 3.  CONCENTRATION CALIBRATION SOLUTIONS
Analyte
2-378-TCDD
2378 -TCDF
12378 -PeCDF
12378-PeCDD
*23478-PeCDF
*123478-HxCDF
123678 -HxCDF
*123478-HxCDD
123678 -HxCDD
*123789-HxCDD
*234678 -HxCDF
*123789 -HxCDF
*1234789-HpCDF
1234678 -HpCDF
1234678 -HpCDD
OCDD
OCDF
Hcj^-2378-TCDD
J-,C12- 2378 -TCDF
^C12-123678-HxCDD
r,C12- 1234678 -HpCDF
13c12-°CDD
;j-3C12-1234-TCDD
C12- 123789 -HxCDD
37Cl4-2378-TCDD
CC1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1


0.25
—
0.25

—

0.25
0.25
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
1.0
1.0
0.5
0.5
—
CC2
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
	
	
0.625
—
0.625
—
—
—
0.625
0.625
1.25
1.25
0.5
0.5
0.5
1.0
1.0
0.5
0.5
...
CCS
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
1.25
1.25
1.25
1.25
1.25
1.25
1.25
1.25
1.25
1.25
2.5
2.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
1.0
1.0
0.5
0.5
0.25
CC4
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0


2.5

2.5



2.5
2.5
5.0
5.0
0.5
0.5
0.5
1.0
1.0
0.5
0.5

CCS
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
...
...
5.0
—
5.0
	
	
	
5.0
5.0
10.0
10.0
0.5
0.5
0.5
1.0
1.0
0.5
0.5
- - -
All concentrations are in ng/uL.

 Supplemental commercial standard.  Do not perform %RSD calculations on these
analytes.  (See Paragraph 7.4.1 for CC3 standard preparation.)
                                   D-57
DFLM01.0

-------
 TABLE 4.  INTERNAL STANDARD, RECOVERY STANDARD, AND
              CLEANUP STANDARD SOLUTIONS
              INTERNAL STANDARD SOLUTION
Internal Standards                         Concentration
                                              5
  c12-2378-TCDF                               5 ns/uL
 7.C12- 123678 -HxCDD                            5 ns/«L
r-;:Ci2- 1234678 -HpCDF                          10 ng/uL
13C12-OCDD                                   10 ng/uL
              RECOVERY STANDARD SOLUTION


Recovery Standards                         Concentration

J-3C12-1234-TCDD                               5 ng/uL
13Ci2-l23789-HxCDD                            5 ng/uL
               CLEANUP  STANDARD  SOLUTION


Cleanup Standards                          Concentration

37Cl4-2378-TCDD                               5 ng/uL
                        D-58                             DFLM01.0

-------
     TABLE 5.  IONS SPECIFIED FOR SELECTED ION MONITORING FOR PCDDs/PCDFs
Analvte                      Ouantitation Ions        M-fCOCll+


TCDD                         320            322           259
PeCDD                        356            358           293
HxCDD                        390            392           327
HpCDD                        424            426           361
OCDD                         458            460           395

TCDF                         304            306           243
PeCDF                        340            342           277
HxCDF                        374            376           311
HpCDF                        408            4lO           345
OCDF                         442            444           379

Internal Standards

13C12-2378-TCDD              332            334
13C12-123678-HxCDD           402            404
13Ci2-OCDD                   470            472
13C12-2378-TCDF              316            318
13Ci2-1234678-HPCDF          420            422

Recovery Standards

13C12-1234-TCDD              332            334
13C12-123789-HxCDD           402            404

Cleanup Standard

37C14-2378-TCDD              328            (1)           263

Polychlorinated
diphenyl ethers

HxCDPE                      376
HpCDPE                      410
OCDPE                       446            	            	
NCDPE                       480
DCDPE                       514
 (1)  There is only one quantitation ion monitored for the cleanup standard.
                                    D-59                       DFLM01.1  (9/91)

-------
 TABLE 6.  CRITERIA FOR ISOTOPIC RATIO MEASUREMENTS  FOR PCDDs/PCDFs
Analyte

;.CDD
PeCDD
HxCDD
HpCDD
OCDD

TCDF
PeCDF
HxCDF
HpCDF
OCDF

Internal Standards
13
13
13
13
13
C12-1234-TCDD
C12-123678-HxCDD
G12-2378-TCDF
C12- 1234678 -HPCDF
Recovery Standards

j'3C12-1234-TCDD
13C12-123789-HxCDD
                       Selected
                         Ions

                       320/322
                       356/358
                       390/392
                       424/426
                       458/460

                       304/306
                       340/342
                       374/376
                       408/410
                       442/444
332/334
402/404
470/472
316/318
420/422
                        332/334
                        402/404
              Theoretical
             Ion Abundance

                 0.77
                 1.55
                 1.24
                 1.04
                 0.89

                 0.77
                 1.55
                 1.24
                 1.04
                 0.89
0.77
1.24
0.89
0.77
1.04
                 0.77
                 1.24
Control
Limits
0.65
1.24
1.05
0.88
0.76
0.65
1.24
1.05
0.88
0.76
0.65
1.05
0.76
0.65
0.88
0.65
1.05
- 0.89
- 1.86
- 1.43
- 1.20
-1.02
- 0.89
- 1.86
- 1.43
-1.20
- 1.02
- 0.89
- 1.43
-1.01
- 0.89
-1.20
- 0.89
- 1.43
                               D-60
                                                              DFLM01.0

-------
          TABLE 7.  RECOMMENDED SELECTED  ION MONITORING DESCRIPTORS
Descriptor 1
Descriptor 2
Descriptor 3
Descriptor 4
2.43
259
277
293
304
306
316
318
320
322
328
332
334
340
342
356
358
376
277
293
311
327
338
340
342
354
356
358
374
376
390
392
402
404
410
446
311
327
345
361
374
376
390
392
402
404
408
410
420
422
424
426
446
480
345
361
379
395
408
410
420
422
424
426
442
444
458
460
470 .
472
480
514
The ions at m/z 376 (HxCDPE), 410 (HpCDPE), 446 (OCDPE), 480  (NCDPE) and  514
(DCDPE) represent the polychlorinated diphenyl ethers.


The ions in each of the four recommended descriptors are arranged so that
there is overlap between the descriptors.  The ions for the TCDD, TCDF, PeCDD
and PeCDF isomers are in the first descriptor, the ions for the PeCDD, PeCDF,
HxCDD and HxCDF isomers are in the second descriptor, the ions for  the HxCDD,
HxCDF, HpCDD and HpCDF isomers are in the third descriptor, and the ions  for
the HpCDD, HpCDF, OCDD and OCDF isomers are in the fourth descriptor.


NOTE:     The descriptors used by the laboratory must be documented, and this
          information must be available for examination during the EPA on-site
          evaluations.
                                   D-61
                                                 DFLM01.0

-------
TABLE 8.  RELATIONSHIP OF INTERNAL STANDARDS TO ANALYTES, AND RELATIONSHIP OF
   RECOVERY STANDARDS TO ANALYTES, INTERNAL STANDARDS AND CLEANUP STANDARD
                       INTERNAL STANDARDS VS. ANALYTES
13
  C-L2-TCDD

   TCDD
   PeCDD
13
  C12-HxCDD
   HxCDD
   HpCDD
13,
OCDD
OCDF
            13
   C12-TCDF

    TCDF
    PeCDF
                 13
                                  C12-HpCDF

                                  HxCDF
                                  HpCDF
   RECOVERY STANDARDS VS.  ANALYTES,  INTERNAL STANDARDS AND CLEANUP STANDARD
                 13C12-1234-TCDD
                             13
                      TCDD
                      TCDF
                      PeCDD
                      PeCDF
                 13
                 13
                 37
      -2378-TCDD
   C12-2378-TCDF
   Cl4-2378-TCDD
         13
         13
         13
                               C12-123789-HxCDD

                                    HxCDD
                                    HxCDF
                                    HpCDD
                                    HpCDF
                                    OCDD
                                    OCDF
c12-123678-HxCDD
C12-1234678-HpCDF
C^-OCDD
                                   D-62
                                                     DFLM01.0

-------
TABLE 9.  PCDD/PCDF ISOMERS IN THE WINDOW DEFINING MIX FOR A 60 M DB-5 (OR
                            EQUIVALENT) COLUMN
Homologue
TCDD
TCDF
PeCDD
PeCDF
HxCDD
HxCDF
HpCDD
HpCDF
First
Eluted
1368-
1368-
12479-
13468-
124679-
123468-
1234679-
1234678-
                                    Last
                                   Eluted
                                    1289-
                                    1289-
                                    12389-
                                    12389-
                                   123467-
                                   123489-
                                 1234678-
                                 1234789-
 Approximate
Concentration
   0.5
   0.5
   0.5
   0.5
   1.25
   1.25
   1.25
   1.25
                                  D-63
               DFLH01.0

-------
           TABLE 10.  SUPPLEMENTAL CALIBRATION SOLUTION
Analvte                Concentration Cng/uL)

23478-PeCDF                      4
123789-HxCDD                    10
123478-HxCDD                    10
123478-HxCDF                    10
123789-HxCDF                    10
234678-HxCDF                    10
1234789-HpCDF                   10
The supplemental calibration solution is commercially
supplied and is used for preparation of the CC3 solution.
(See Paragraph 7.4.1 for CC3 preparation.)
                              D-64                             DFLM01.0

-------
                      TABLE 11.  MATRIX SPIKING SOLUTION
      Analyte                Concentration fng/uL')

      2378-TCDD                      2.5
      2378-TCDF                      2.5
      12378-PeCDF                   6.25
      12378-PeCDD                   6.25
      123678-HxCDF                  6.25
      123678-HxCDD                  6.25
      1234678-HpCDF                 6.25
      1234678-HpCDD                 6.25
      OCDD                          12.5
      OCDF                          12.5
This solution is prepared in tridecane (or nonane) and diluted with
acetone prior to use (see Section 5.18).
                                   D-65                              DFLM01.0

-------
TABLE 12.  COLUMN PERFORMANCE SOLUTION FOR A SP-2331 (OR EQUIVALENT) COLUMN
                                              Approximate
  Isomer                                Concentrations  fng/uL')

 1478-TCDD                                        0.5
 2378-TCDD                                        0.5
 1237/1238-TCDD                                   0.5


 The commercially supplied column performance solution may be combined with
 the window defining mix, provided that the combined soultion contains the
 isomers needed to determine that the criteria for both analyses can be met
 (see Paragraph 7.2.2).
                                  D-66                              DFLM01.0

-------
       TABLE  13.  EXAMPLE ANALYTICAL SEQUENCES
Time
Hour 0
Hour 12

Hour 0
                    Analysis

                    Window Defining Mix
                    Column Performance Solution  (SP-2331)
                    CC3
                    CC1  (Initial Calibration)
                    CC2
                    CC4
                    CCS
                    Blanks and Samples
                     o
                     o
                     o
                     o

                    CGI
                    Column Performance Solution  (SP-2331)
                    CC3
                    Blanks and Samples
                     o
                     o
                     o
                     o
Hour 12

Hour 0
                    CC1
                    Column Performance Solution (SP-2331)
                    CC3
                    Blanks and Samples
                     o
                     o
                     o
                    etc.
NOTE:
                    CC1 (whenever the sequence does end)

       Matrix spike and duplicate samples may be analyzed in
       place of any "sample" listed above.
                       D-67
                                                         DFLM01.0

-------
                Complex Waste
                   Sample
               (including waters,
               soils, stillbottoms,
                 oils, sludges,
                     etc.)
                   Sample
                   Extract
                60% CH2CI2/hexane
                     fraction
                Analyze by GC/MS
                                    (1) Add internal standards
                                    (2) Perform matrix-specific extraction
                                    (1) Wash with concentrated H2SO4
                                    (2) Wash with 5% NaCI
                                    (3) Wash with 20% KOH
                                    (4) Wash with 5% NaCI
                                    (5) Dry extract
                                    (6) Solvent exchange
                                    (7) Silica gel column cleanup
                                    (8) Alumina column cleanup
                                     (1) Concentrate eluate
                                     (2) Carbon column cleanup
                                     (3) Add recovery standard(s)
Figure 1:  Flow Chart for Sample Extraction and Cleanup for the Analysis of
          PCDDs and PCDFs in Complex Waste Samples

-------
  2





  3
                       O
8




7
  2




  3
         Polychlorinated Dibenzo-p-Dioxin
           Polychlorinated Dibenzofuran
8




7
                                                  where x + y < 8
Figure 2: General Structures of PCDDs and PCDFs

-------
     lonCurrent(x 10-2)
2.5 -
1.5 -
0.5
  0
                  11     16     21
 26     31     36     41      46     51
Scan Number
                       Figure 3: Measurement of Signal-To-Noise Ratio

-------
Figure 4: Soxhiet/Dean-Stark Extractor

-------
  ^
  "w
   CD
  DC
                          1237/1238-TCDD
                            2378-TCDD
                       1478-TCDD
                                     Time
Figure 5: Valley Between 2378-TCDD and Other Closely Eluting Isomers on an
         SP-2331 (or Equivalent) Column

-------
                   EXHIBIT E
QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS
                                                       DFLM01.0

-------
                              Table  of Contents
OVERVIEW
                                                                         Page
   E-3
SECTION I:    Introduction   	   E-4




SECTION II:    Quality Assurance Plan	   E-6




SECTION III:   Standard Operating Procedures   	   E-8




SECTION IV:    QA/QC Requirements   	   E-ll




SECTION V:    Analytical Standards Requirements   	   E-18




SECTION VI:    Contract Compliance Screening   	   E-23




SECTION VII:   Regional Data Review   	   E-24




SECTION VIII: Laboratory Evaluation Samples   	   E-25




SECTION IX:    GC/MS Tape Audits   	   E-27




SECTION X:    On-site Laboratory Evaluations   	   E-28




SECTION XI:    Quality Assurance and Data Trend Analysis   	   E-31




SECTION XII:   Data Management   	   E-32




REFERENCES   	   E-34
                                     E-2
DFLM01.0

-------
                                   OVERVIEW
Quality assurance (QA) and quality control (QC) are integral parts of the
CLP. '  ' ' '   The QA process consists of management review and oversight at
the planning, implementation, and completion stages of the environmental data
collection activity to ensure that data provided are of ...ie quality required.
The QC process includes those activities required during data collection to
produce the data quality desired and to document the quality of the collected
data.1

During the planning of an environmental data collection program, QA
activities focus on defining data quality criteria and designing a QC system
to measure the quality of data being generated.  During the implementation of
the data collection effort, QA activities ensure that the QC system is
functioning effectively, and that the deficiencies uncovered by the QC system
are corrected.  After environmental data are collected, QA activities focus
on assessing the quality of data obtained to determine its suitability to
support enforcement or remedial decisions. ''

This exhibit describes the overall QA/QC operations and the processes by
which the CLP meets the QA/QC objective defined above.  This contract
requires a variety of QA/QC activities. These contract requirements are the
minimum QC operations necessary to satisfy the analytical requirements
associated with the determination of the different method analytes.  These QC
operations are designed to facilitate laboratory comparison by providing the
EPA with comparable data from all Contractors.  These requirements do not
release the analytical Contractor from maintaining their own QC checks on
method and instrument performance.
                                     E-3                               DFLM01.0

-------
                                   SECTION  I
                                 INTRODUCTION
Appropr..ji;e use of data generated under the great range of analytical
conditions encountered in environmental analyses requires reliance on the QC
procedures and criteria incorporated into the methods.   The methods in this
contract have been validated on samples typical of those received by the
laboratories in the CLP.  However, the validation of these methods does not
guarantee that the methods perform equally well for all sample matrices
encountered.  Inaccuracies can also result from causes other than
unanticipated matrix effects, such as sampling artifacts, equipment
malfunctions, and operator error.  Therefore, the QC component of each method
is indispensable.

The data acquired from QC procedures are used to estimate and evaluate the
information content of analytical results and to determine the necessity for
or the effect of corrective action procedures.  The means used to estimate
information content include precision, accuracy, detection limit, and other
quantitative and qualitative indicators.  In addition,  the QC component gives
an overview of the activities required in an integrated program to generate
data of known and documented quality required to meet defined objectives.

The necessary components of a complete QA/QC program include internal QC
criteria that demonstrate acceptable levels of performance,  as determined by
QA review.  External review of data and procedures is accomplished by the
monitoring activities of the National Program Office (NPO),  Regional data
users, the Sample Management Office (SMO), the National Enforcement
Investigations Center (NEIC), and the Environmental Monitoring Systems
Laboratory (EMSL-LV).  Each external review accomplishes a different purpose.
These reviews are described in specific sections of this exhibit.
Performance evaluation (PE) samples and magnetic tape audits provide an
external QA reference for the program.  A laboratory on-site evaluation
system is also part of the external QA monitoring.  A feedback loop provides
the results of the various review functions to the contract laboratories
through direct communications with the Administrative Project Officer (APO)
and Technical Project Officer (TPO).

This exhibit is not a guide to constructing QA project plans, QC systems, or
a QA organization.  However, the exhibit does explain the QA/QC requirements
of the program, outlines some minimum standards for QA/QC programs, and
includes specific items that are required in a QA Plan and QA/QC
documentation detailed in this contract.  Delivery of this documentation
provides EPA with a complete data package which will stand alone, and limits
the need for contact with the Contractor or with an analyst, at a later date,
if some aspect of the analysis is questioned.

In order to assure that the product delivered by the Contractor meets the
requirements of the contract, and to  improve interlaboratory data comparison,
EPA requires the following from  the Contractor:
                                     E-4                               DFLM01.0

-------
A written QA Plan, the elements of which are designated in Section
II.
Written preparation of and adherence to QA/QC standard operating
procedures (SOPs) as described in Section III.

Adherence to the analytical methods and associated QC requirements
specified in the contract.

Verification of an analytical standard and documentation of the
purity of neat materials and the purity and accuracy of solutions
obtained from private chemical supply houses.

Submission of all raw data and pertinent documentation for Regional
review.

Participation in the analysis of laboratory evaluation samples,
including adherence to corrective action procedures.

Submission, upon request, of GC/MS tapes and applicable
documentation for tape audits.

Participation in on-site laboratory evaluations, including adherence
to corrective action procedures.

Submission of all original documentation generated during sample
analyses for EPA review.
                           E-5                               DFLM01.0

-------
                                  SECTION II
                            QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN


The Contractor shall establish a QA program with the objective of providing
sound analytical chemical measurements.  This program shall incorporate the
QC procedures, any necessary corrective action, and all documentation
required during data collection as well as the quality assessment measures
performed by management to ensure acceptable data production.

As evidence of such a program, the Contractor shall prepare a written QA Plan
(QAP) which describes the procedures that are implemented to achieve the
following:

      o   Maintain data integrity,  validity,  and usability.

      o   Ensure that analytical  measurement  systems  are maintained in an
          acceptable state of stability and reproducibility.

      o   Detect problems  through data  assessment  and establish corrective
          action procedures which keep  the analytical process reliable.

      o   Document all aspects of the measurement  process  in order to provide
          data which are technically sound and legally defensible.

The QAP must present, in specific terms, the policies, organization,
objectives, functional guidelines, and specific QA and QC activities designed
to achieve the data quality requirements in this contract.  Where applicable,
SOPs pertaining to each element shall be included or referenced as part of
the QAP.  The QAP must be available during an on-site laboratory evaluation.
Additional information relevant to the preparation of a QAP can be found in
EPA and ASTM publications. 2>^

The elements of a QAP are as follows:

A.    Organization and Personnel
      1.  QA Policy and Objectives

      2.  QA Management
          a.  Organization

          b.  Assignment of QC and QA Responsibilities

          c.  Reporting Relationships

          d.  QA Document Control  Procedures

          e.  QA Program Assessment Procedures

      3.  Personnel

          a.  Resumes

          b.  Education and Experience  Pertinent to this Contract

          c.  Training Progress
                                     E-6                               DFLM01.1 (9/91)

-------
B.    Facilities and Equipment
      1.  Instrumentation and Backup  Alternatives
      2.  Maintenance Activities  and  Schedules
C.    Document Control
      1.  Laboratory Notebook Policy
      2.  Samples Tracking/Custody Procedures
      3.  Logbook Maintenance and Archiving Procedures
      4.  Case File Organization,  Preparation and  Review Procedures
      5.  Procedures for  Preparation,  Approval,  Review,  Revision,  and
          Distribution  of SOPs
      6.  Process for Revision of Technical or Documentation Procedures
D.    Analytical Methodology
      1.  Calibration Procedures  and  Frequency
      2 .  Sample  Preparation/Extraction Procedures
      3.  Sample  Analysis Procedures
      4.  Standards Preparation Procedures
      5.  Decision Processes,  Procedures, and Responsibility for Initiation of
          Corrective Action
E.    Data Generation
      1.  Data Collection Procedures
      2.  Data Reduction  Procedures
      3.  Data Validation Procedures
      4.  Data Reporting  and Authorization  Procedures
F.    Quality Control
      1.  Solvent,  Reagent and Adsorbent Check Analysis
      2.  Reference Material Analysis
      3.  Internal Quality Control Checks
      4.  Corrective Action and Determination of QC Limit Procedures
      5.  Responsibility  Designation
G.    Quality Assurance
      1.  Data Quality  Assurance
      2.  Systems/Internal Audits
      3.  Performance/External Audits
      4.  Corrective Action Procedures
      5.  Quality Assurance Reporting Procedures
      6.  Responsibility  Designation

          •"-                         E-7a                              DFLM01.0

-------
Updating and Submission of the OAF:

Within 60 days of contract award:

During the contract solicitation process, the Contractor was required to
submit their QAP to EMSL-LV and NEIC.  Within sixty (60) days after contract
award, the Contractor shall send a revised QAP, fully compliant with the
requirements of this contract, to the TPO, EMSL-LV and NEIC.  The revised QAP
will become the official QAP under the contract.  The revised QAP must
include:

     1.   Changes  resulting from the  Contractor's  internal  review of their
          organization,  personnel,  facility,  equipment,  policy and procedures
          and the  Contractor's implementation of the  requirements of the
          contract;  and

     2.   Changes  resulting from the  Agency's review  of the laboratory
          evaluation sample data,  bidder-supplied  documentation,  and
          recommendations  made during the preaward laboratory site evaluation.

Subsequent submissions:

During the term of contract, the Contractor shall amend the QAP when the
following circumstances occur:

     1.   The Agency modifies  the  contract,

     2.   The Agency notifies  the  Contractor  of deficiencies in the QAP,

     3.   The Agency notifies  the  Contractor  of deficiencies resulting from
          the Agency's review  of the  Contractor's  performance,

     4.   The Contractor identifies deficiencies resulting  from the internal
          review of the QAP,

     5.   The Contractor's organization,  personnel, facility, equipment,
          policy or procedures change,  or

     6.   The Contractor identifies deficiencies resulting  from the internal
          review of their organization,  personnel, facility, equipment,  policy
          or procedures.

The Contractor shall amend the QAP within 30 days of when  the circumstances
listed above result in a discrepancy between what was previously  described  in
the QAP and what is presently occurring  at the Contractor's  facility.  When
the QAP is amended, all changes in the QAP must be clearly marked (i.e.,
indicating where the change is in the document with a bar  in the  margin,
underlining the change, printing the change in bold,  or using a different
print  font).  The amended pages must have the date on which  the changes were
implemented.
                                     E-7b
DFLM01.1 (9/91

-------
The Contractor shall incorporate all amendments to the current QAP.  The
Contractor shall archive all amendments to the QAP for future reference by
the Agency.  The Contractor shall send a copy of the current QAP within 14
days of a request by the TPO or APO to the designated recipients.

Corrective action:

If the Contractor fails to adhere to these requirements, the Contractor may
expect, but the Agency is not limited to, the following actions:  reduction
of numbers of samples sent under this contract, suspension of sample shipment
to the Contractor, GC/MS tape audit, data package audit, on-site laboratory
evaluation, remedial laboratory evaluation sample, and/or contract sanctions,
such as a Cure Notice.
                                     E-7c                              DFLM01.1 (9,

-------
                                 SECTION III


                        STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES
In order to obtain reliable results,  adherence to prescribed analytical
methodology is imperative. In any operation that is performed on a repetitive
basis, reproducibility is best accomplished through the use of SOPs.  As
defined by EPA, a SOP is a written document which provides directions for the
step-by-step execution of an operation, analysis or action which is commonly
accepted as the method for performing certain routine or repetitive tasks.

SOPs prepared by the Contractor must be functional, i.e., clear,
comprehensive, up-to-date, and sufficiently detailed to permit duplication of
results by qualified analysts.  All SOPs, as presented to EPA, must reflect
activities as they are currently performed in the laboratory.  In addition,
all SOPs must meet the following criteria:

      o   Be consistent with current  EPA regulations,  guidelines,  and the
          contract's requirements.3'*'5'6''

      o   Be consistent with instrument manufacturers'  specific instruction
          manuals.

      o   Be available to the EPA during an on-site laboratory evaluation.   A
          complete set of SOPs shall  be bound together and available for
          inspection at such evaluations.  During on-site evaluations,
          laboratory personnel may be asked to demonstrate the application of
          the SOPs.

      o   Provide for the development of documentation that is sufficiently
          complete to record the performance of all tasks required by the
          protocol.

      o   Demonstrate the validity of data reported by the Contractor and
          explain the cause of missing or inconsistent results.
      o   Describe the corrective measures and feedback mechanism utilized
          when analytical results do  not meet protocol requirements.

      o   Be reviewed regularly and updated as necessary when contract,
          facility or Contractor procedural modifications are made.
      o   Be archived for future reference in usability or evidentiary
          situations.

      o   Be available at specific work stations as appropriate

      o   Be subject to a document control procedure which precludes the use
          of outdated or inappropriate SOPs.

A.    SOP Format

      The format for SOPs may vary depending upon  the kind of activity for
      which they are prepared; however,  at  a minimum, the following sections
      must  be  included:
                                     E-8                               DFLM01.0

-------
          o   Title page.
          o   Scope and application.
          o   Definitions.
          o   Procedures.
          o   QC limits.
          o   Corrective action procedures, including procedures for secondary
             review of information being generated.
          o   Documentation description and example forms.
          o   Miscellaneous notes and precautions.
          o   References.
B.    Required SOPs
      The following SOPs are required by EPA:
          1.   Evidentiary SOPs  (see Exhibit F).
          2.   Sample receipt and storage.
          3.   Sample preparation.
          4.   Calibration.
          5.   Standards purity/preparation.
          6.   Maintaining instrument records and logbooks.
          7.   Sample analysis and data control systems.
          8.   Glassware  cleaning.
          9.   Technical  and managerial review of laboratory operation and
              data package preparation.
          10.  Internal  review of contractually required QA/QC data  for  each
              individual data package.
          11.  Chain-of-custody  procedures and document control  including
              Complete  Sample Delivery Group (SDG) File preparation.
          12.  Laboratory data validation/laboratory self-inspection.
              a.   Data flow and chain-of-command for data review.
              b.   Procedures for measuring precision and accuracy.
              c.   Evaluation parameters for identifying systematic errors.
              d.   Procedures to assure that hardcopy deliverables  are
                   complete and compliant with the requirements in  Exhibit B.
               3*-
                                     E-9                               DFLM01.0

-------
              e.   Demonstration of internal QA inspection procedures
                   (demonstrated by supervisory sign-off on personal
                   notebooks,  internal PE samples,  etc.).

              f.   Frequency and type of internal audits (e.g., random,
                   quarterly,  spot checks,  perceived trouble areas).

              g.   Demonstration of problem identification-corrective actions
                   and resumption of analytical processing and sequence
                   resulting from internal audit (i.e.,  QA feedback).

              h.   Documentation of audit reports (internal and external),
                   response, corrective action, etc.

         13.  Data management and handling.

              a.   Procedures for controlling and estimating data entry
                   errors.

              b.   Procedures for reviewing changes to data and deliverables
                   and ensuring traceability of updates.

              c.   Lifecycle management procedures  for testing, modifying and
                   implementing changes to existing computing systems
                   including hardware, software, and documentation or
                   installing new systems.

              d.   Database security, backup and archival procedures
                   including recovery from system failures.

              e.   System maintenance procedures and response time.

              f.   Individuals(s) responsible for system operation,
                   maintenance, data integrity and security.

              g.   Specifications for staff training procedures.

C.    SOP Delivery Requirements

      Updating and submission of SOPs:

      During the contract solicitation process, the Contractor was required
      to submit their SOPs  to EMSL-LV and NEIC.  Within sixty (60) days after
      contract award, the Contractor shall send a complete revised set of
      SOPs, fully compliant with the requirements of this contract, to the
      TPO,  EMSL-LV and NEIC.  The revised SOPs will become the official SOPs
      under the contract.  The revised SOPs must include:

         1.   Changes resulting  from the Contractor's internal  review of
              their  procedures and  the  Contractor's implementation of the
              requirements  of  the contract;
                                     E-lOa                             DFLM01.1  (9/91]

-------
    2.   Changes  resulting  from  the Agency's  review of  the  laboratory
        evaluation  sample  data, bidder-supplied documentation,  and
        recommendations made during  the preaward  laboratory site
        evaluation.

Subsequent submissions:

During the term of contract, the Contractor shall amend the SOPs when
the following circumstances occur:

    1.   The Agency  modifies the contract,

    2.   The Agency  notifies the Contractor of deficiencies in their
        SOPs documentation,

    3.   The Agency  notifies the Contractor of deficiencies resulting
        from the Agency's  review  of  the Contractor's performance,

    4.   The Contractor's procedures  change,

    5.   The Contractor identifies deficiencies resulting from the
        internal review of their  SOPs, or

    6.   The Contractor identifies deficiencies resulting from the
        internal review of their procedures.

The SOPs must be amended or new SOPs must be written within 30 days of
when the circumstances listed above result in a discrepancy between
what was previously described in the SOPs and what is presently
occurring at the Contractor's facility.   All changes in the SOPs must
be clearly marked (i.e, indicating where the change is in the document
with a bar in the margin,  underlining the change,  printing the change
in bold, or using a different print font).   The amended/new SOPs must
have the date on which the changes were implemented.

When the SOPs are amended  or new SOPs are written, the Contractor shall
document in a letter the reasons for the changes,  and submit the
amended SOPs or new SOPs to the TPO, EMSL-LV (quality
assurance/technical SOPs)  and NEIC (evidentiary SOPs).  The Contractor
shall send the letter and  the amended sections of the SOPs or new SOPs
within 14 days of the change.  An alternate delivery schedule for the
submittal of the letter and amended/new SOPs may be proposed by the
Contractor, but it  is the  sole decision of the Agency, represented
either by the TPO or APO,  to approve or disapprove the alternate
delivery schedule.  If an  alternate  delivery schedule  is proposed, the
Contractor shall describe  in a letter to the TPO, APO, and the
Contracting Officer why he/she is unable to meet  the delivery schedule
listed  in this section.  The TPO/APO will not grant an extension for
greater than 30  days for amending/writing new SOPs.  The TPO/APO will
not grant an extension for greater than 14 days for submission  of the
letter  documenting  the reasons for the changes and for submitting
amended/new SOPs.   The Contractor shall proceed and not assume  that an
extension will be granted  until so notified by the TPO and/or APO.
                               E-lOb
DFLM01.1 (9/91)

-------
The Contractor shall send a complete set of current SOPs within 14 days
of a request by the TPO or APO to the recipients he/she designates.

Corrective action:

If the Contractor fails to adhere to these requirements, the Contractor
may expect, but the Agency is not limited to, the following action:
reduction of number of samples sent under this contract, suspension of
sample shipment to the Contractor, GC/MS tape audit, data package
audit, on-site laboratory evaluation, remedial laboratory evaluation
sample, and/or contract sanction, such as a Cure Notice.
                               E-lOc                             DFLM01.1 (9/

-------
                                  SECTION IV


                              QA/QC REQUIREMENTS


 ..^^ ..ec^on out1.:  - cue minimum QC operations necessary to satisfy the
analytical requirements associated with the detection and quantitative
measurement of 2378-tetrachlorinated dibenzo-p-dioxin and total tetra-,
penta-,  hexa-, hepta- and octachlorinated dibenzo-p-dioxins (PCDDs) and
dibenzofurans (PCDFs), by using the procedures outlined in Exhibit D.  This
section is not intended as a comprehensive QC document, but rather as a guide
to the specific QC operations that must be considered for PCDD/PCDF analysis.

The QC operations that must be considered include the following:

      o   Mass Calibration.

      o   Window Defining Mix.

      o   Chromatographic Resolution.

      o   GC/MS Initial Calibration.

      o   GC/MS Continuing Calibration.

      o   Instrument Sensitivity.

      o   Identification Criteria.

      o   Method Blank Analysis.

      o   Spiked Sample Analysis.

      o   Duplicate Sample Analysis.

      o   Toxicity Equivalency Factor and Isomer Specificity.

      o   Dilutions.

      o   Reanalyses.

1.    Mass Calibration

1.1   Mass calibration of the mass spectrometer is recommended prior to
      analyzing  the calibration solutions, blanks, samples and QC  samples.
      It  is recommended  that the instrument be tuned to greater sensitivity
      in  the high mass range in order to achieve better response for the
      later eluting compounds.

1.2   Optimum  results using FC-43  for mass calibration can be achieved by
      scanning from 222-510 amu every one second or less, utilizing 70 volts
      (nominal)  electron energy in the  electron ionization mode (see Exhibit
      D,  Section 6).

1.3   m/z 414  and m/z 502  should be  30-50 percent of m/z  264 base  peak (see
      Exhibit  D,  Section 6).
                                      E-ll                             DFLM01.0

-------
2.    Window Defining Mix

2.1   The window defining mix is analyzed to verify that the switching times
      between the descriptors have been appropriately set.

2.2   The window defining mix is obtained from commercial sources and must
      contain the first and last eluting isomers in each homologue on the GC
      column chosen for analyses (see Exhibit D, Section 5.12 and Table 9).

2.3   The window defining mix must be analyzed before the initial calibration
      on each instrument and GC column used for analysis and at the frequency
      found in Exhibit D, Paragraph 7.1.3.

3.    Chromatographic Resolution

3.1   Chromatographic resolution is evaluated using one of two standard
      solutions, depending on the GC column chosen for analyses.

3.2   For analyses on a DB-5 (or equivalent) GC column, the Chromatographic
      resolution is evaluated by the analysis of the CCS standard during both
      the initial and continuing calibration procedures (see Exhibit D,
      Paragraphs 7.3.2.1 and 7.4.2).

3.3   For analyses on a SP-2331 (or equivalent) GC column,  the
      Chromatographic resolution is evaluated before the analysis of any
      calibration standard by the analysis of a commercially available column
      performance mixture (see Exhibit D, Section 5.19) that contains the
      TCDD isomers that elute most closely with 2378-TCDD on this GC column
      (1478-TCDD and the 1237/1238-TCDD pair) (see Exhibit D, Paragraph
      7.2.2).

3.4   The Chromatographic resolution criteria are found in Exhibit D,
      Paragraphs 7.3.2.1 and 7.2.3.

4.    GC/MS Initial Calibration

4.1   Prior to analysis of samples and blanks, the GC/MS system must be
      initially calibrated at a minimum of five concentrations to verify
      linearity of response.

4.2   The calibration solutions containing the labeled and unlabeled analogs
      must be analyzed at five concentrations as described in Exhibit D,
      Section 5.11 and Table 3.

4.3   The CC1, CC2, CC4 and CCS solutions shall be used as provided by EPA
      (see Exhibit D, Section 7.3).  The  CC3 solution must be prepared as
      explained in Exhibit D, Paragraph 7.4.1.

4.4   The calibration standard must be analyzed using the MS/DS conditions as
      described in Exhibit D, Paragraph 7.3.1.
                                                 10                  10
4.5   The Chromatographic resolution between the   C]_2 2378-TCDD and   C]^
      1234-TCDD isomers must be resolved  with a valley of <  25 percent, and


           ~~                        E-12                             DFLM01.0

-------
      the chromatographic peak separation between the 123478-HxCDD and
      123678-HxCDD in the CC3 solution must be resolved with a valley of < 50
      percent (see Exhibit D, Paragraph 7.3.2.1).

4.6   The relative ion abundance criteria for PCDDs/PCDFs must be met for all
      PCDD/PCDF peaks, including the labeled internal and recovery standards,
      in all solutions (see Exhibit D, Table 6).

4.7   For all calibration solutions, the retention times of the isomers must
      fall within the appropriate retention time windows established by the
      window defining mix (see Exhibit D, Section 7.1).

4.8   For all calibration solutions, the signal-to-noise ratio must meet the
      criteria specified in Exhibit D, Paragraph 7.3.2.4.

4.9   The relative response factors for the 17 unlabeled target analytes
      relative to their appropriate internal standards, and the relative
      response of the five labeled internal standard standards relative to
      the appropriate recovery standard are determined according to the
      procedures in Exhibit D, Paragraph 7.3.3.

4.10  Calculate the mean RRF and percent relative standard deviation (%RSD)
      of the five KRFs (CC1 to CCS) for each unlabeled PCDD/PCDF, and labeled
      internal and recovery standards, present in all five concentration
      calibration solutions as described in Exhibit D, Paragraph 7.3.5.  As
      indicated in the referenced paragraph, no %RSD calculation is possible
      for the 2,3,7,8-substituted isomers in the CCS supplemental calibration
      solution, because they are only present in the one solution.

4.11  The %RSD is calculated for the EPA-supplied unlabeled and labeled
      analytes only.  To establish linearity, the %RSD of the five RRFs (CC1-
      CC5) for the unlabeled PCDDs/PCDFs and the internal standards must not
      exceed 15.0% (see Exhibit D, Paragraph 7.3.5).

4.12  If the initial  calibration criteria for GC resolution, ion abundance
      ratios, retention times, instrument sensitivity and relative response
      factors are not met, the Contractor must take the corrective actions as
      explained in Exhibit D, Paragraph 7.3.7.

4.13  The response factors to be used for determining the total homologue
      concentrations  are described in Exhibit D, Section 15.2.

5.    GC/MS Continuing Calibration

5.1   Once the GC/MS  system has been calibrated, the calibration must be
      verified for each 12-hour time period for each GC/MS system.

5.2   The continuing  calibration standard is prepared by mixing the
      commercially supplied supplemental standard with the EPA supplied CC4
      solution (see Exhibit D, Paragraph 7.4.1).

5.3   The continuing  calibration consists of two parts: evaluation of the
      chromatographic resolution and verification of the RRF values to be
      used for quantitation.  At the beginning of each 12-hour period, the

           *"                        E-13                              DFLM01.0

-------
      chromatographic resolution is verified in the same fashion as in the
      initial calibration, through the analysis of the CC3 solution on the
      DB-5 (or equivalent) column or through the analysis of the column
      performance solution on the SP-2331 (or equivalent) column (see Exhibit
      D, Section 7.4).

5.4   The continuing calibration standard must be analyzed according to the
      procedures given in Exhibit D, Section 7.4, and at the frequency in
      that section.

5.5   Calculate the relative response factors for the 17 unlabeled target
      analytes relative to their appropriate internal standards and the
      response factor for the five labeled internal standard relative to the
      appropriate recovery standard, according to the procedure described in
      Exhibit D, Paragraph 7.4.4.

5.6   The GC resolution criteria for DB-5 or SP-2331 (or equivalent) column,
      as specified in Exhibit D, Paragraph 7.3.2.1 or 7.4.3, must be met
      before the analysis of samples may begin.  If the separation criteria
      for both DB-5 and SP-2331 (or equivalent) column analysis are met, a
      single column analysis may be used.

5.7   The relative ion abundance for all PCDD/PCDF peaks, including the
      labeled internal and recovery standards, for both beginning and ending
      analyses must meet the criteria listed in Exhibit D, Table 6.

5.8   The signal-to-noise ratio for the CC3 and CC1 solutions must meet the
      criteria specified in Exhibit D, Paragraph 7.4.6.3.

5.9   The percent difference for the RRFs must be calculated as explained in
      Exhibit D, Paragraph 7.4.6.4 and must meet the criteria specified in
      that paragraph.

5.10  If the criteria specified in Exhibit D, Paragraph 7.4.6 are not met,
      the Contractor must take the corrective actions outlined in Exhibit D,
      Paragraph 7.4.7.

6.    Instrument Sensitivity

6.1   In order to demonstrate that the GC/MS/DS system has retained adequate
      sensitivity during the course of sample analyses, the Contractor must
      analyze the lowest of the calibration standards (CC1) at the end of
      each 12-hour period during which samples and standards are analyzed.

6.2   Analyze the CC1 solution according to Exhibit D, Paragraph 7.5.1.

6.3   This analysis must meet the retention time criteria in Exhibit D,
      Paragraph 7.5.2.1.

6.4   This analysis must meet the ion abundance ratio criteria in Exhibit D,
      Table 6.
                                     E-14                              DFLM01.0

-------
6.5   For this analysis, the signal-to-noise ratio shall be greater than 2.5
      for the unlabeled PCDD/PCDF ions, and greater than 10.0 for the labeled
      internal and recovery standards.

7.    Identification Criteria

7.1   For a gas chromatographic peak to be unambiguously identified as a
      PCDD/PCDF, the peak must meet all of the following criteria.

7.2   The identification of the PCDD/PCDF isomers is based on simultaneous
      detection of the two most abundant ions in the molecular ion regions
      and the M-COC1 ion.  In order to make a positive identification, the
      relative retention time criteria specified in Exhibit D, Section 11.1
      must be met.

7.3   All of the ions specified for each PCDD/PCDF homologue and labeled
      standards must be present in the selected ion current profile.  The ion
      current response for the analytes and labeled standards must meet the
      QC criteria (see Exhibit D, Section 11.2).

7.4   The integrated ion current for each analyte ion listed in Exhibit D,
      Table 5 must be at least 2.5 times background noise and must not have
      saturated the detector.  The internal standard ions must be at least 10
      times background noise and must not have saturated the detector (see
      Exhibit D, Section 11.3).

7.5   The relative ion abundance criteria for the native analytes and
      internal standard must be met (see Exhibit D, Table 6).

7.6   The identification of a GC peak as a PCDF cannot be made if a signal
      having a signal-to-noise ratio greater than 2.5 is detected in the
      corresponding PCDPE channel (see Exhibit D, Section 11.5).

8.    Method Blank Analysis

8.1   A method blank is a volume of clean reference matrix that is carried
      through the entire analytical sequence.

8.2   A minimum of one blank per matrix must be analyzed with each SDG at a
      frequency described in Exhibit D, Section 12.1.

8.3   An acceptable method blank must not contain any chemical interferences
      or electronic noise at the m/z of the specified unlabeled PCDD/PCDF
      ions which is greater than 5 percent of the signal of the appropriate
      internal standard, or any peak that meets the identifications criteria
      as a PCDD/PCDF which is greater than 2 percent of the appropriate
      internal standard  (see Exhibit D, Section 15.2).

8.4   If the blank is contaminated, the associated positive samples and any
      samples containing peaks that do not meet all the identification
      criteria must be rerun (see Exhibit D, Paragraph 12.2.3).
                                     E-15                              DFLM01.0

-------
9.     Spiked Sample Analysis

9.1   In order to provide data on the accuracy of the analytical method, the
      Contractor is required to prepare and analyze a spiked sample for each
      matrix being analyzed.  For each SDG, the Contractor must prepare a
      spiked sample for all of the matrix types that occur in th° SDG (see
      Exhibit D, Section 13).

9.2   Prepare a spiked sample according to the procedures in Exhibit D,
      Sections 13.1 and 13.2.

9.3   Extract and analyze the spiked sample according to the procedures in
      Exhibit D, Sections 9 and 10.

9.4   Calculate the recovery of the spiked analytes according to the
      procedures in Exhibit D,  Section 13.5.

10.   Duplicate Sample Analysis

10.1  In order to provide data on the precision of the analytical method,  the
      Contractor is required to prepare and analyze a duplicate of one sample
      for each matrix being analyzed.  For each group of samples, the
      laboratory must prepare a duplicate sample for all of the following
      matrix types that occur in the SDG (see Exhibit D, Section 14).

10.2  Prepare a duplicate sample according to the procedures in Exhibit D,
      Section 14.1.

10.3  Extract and analyze the spiked sample according to the procedures in
      Exhibit D, Sections 9 and 10.

10.4  Calculate the relative percent difference between the results of the
      original analysis and the duplicate analysis according to the
      procedures in Exhibit D,  Section 14.3.

11.   Toxicity Equivalency Factor and Isomer Specificity

11.1  The 2378-TCDD toxicity equivalence of PCDDs/PCDFs present in the sample
      must be calculated according to procedures outlined in Exhibit D,
      Section 15.8.

11.2  Isomer specificity for all 2,3,7,8-substituted PCDDs/PCDFs cannot be
      achieved on  the 60-m DB-5 column alone.  Historically, problems have
      been associated with the separation of 2378-TCDD from 1237-TCDD and
      1268-TCDD, and the separation of 2378-TCDF from 2347-TCDF.  Because of
      the toxicologic concern associated with 2378-TCDD and 2378-TCDF,
      additional analyses may be required for some samples as described in
      Exhibit D, Section 16.

11.3  If the toxicity equivalence calculated in Section 15 is greater than
      0.7 ppb  (soil/sediment or fly ash), 7 ppb (chemical waste), or 7 ppt
      (aqueous), better isomer specificity  is required than can be achieved
                                     E-16                              DFLM01.0

-------
      on the DB-5 column.  The Contractor may utilize either of the two
      options listed in Exhibit D,  Paragraphs 16.1.1 or 16.1.2 to achieve
      adequate isomer specificity.
12.   Dilutions
      If the concentration of any PCDD/PCDF in the sample exceeds the
      calibration range or the detector is saturated,  a dilution must be
      performed using the procedures given in Exhibit D,  Section 10.4.
13.   Reanalvses
      The requirements for reextraction and for reanalysis of samples are
      given in Exhibit D, Section 17.
                                     E-17                              DFLM01.0

-------
                                  SECTION V
                      ANALYTICAL STANDARDS REQUIREMENTS
A.    Overview
      EPA will not supply all the analytical reference standards required for
      performance of this contract.   See Exhibit D,  Section 5 for the
      standards that may be provided by EPA, subject to availability.
      Contractors will be required to prepare from neat materials or purchase
      from private chemical supply houses the standards not supplied by EPA   |
      but necessary to successfully and accurately perform the analyses
      required in this contract.

B.    Preparation of Chemical Standards from the Neat High Purity Bulk
      Material

      The Contractor may prepare  chemical standards from neat materials.
      Commercial sources for neat chemical standards pertaining to compounds
      listed on the Target Compound List are given in Appendix C of the
      "Quality Assurance Materials Bank: Analytical Reference Standards,"
      Seventh Edition, January 1988.  Laboratories should obtain the highest
      purity possible when purchasing neat chemical standards; standards
      purchased at less than 97%  purity must be documented as to why a higher
      purity could not be obtained.

      1.  Neat chemical standards  must be kept  refrigerated when not being
          used in the preparation  of standard solutions.   Proper storage  of
          neat chemicals is essential in order  to  safeguard them from
          decomposition.

      2.  The purity of a compound can sometimes be  misrepresented by a
          chemical supply house.   Since knowledge  of purity is needed to
          calculate the concentration of solute in a solution standard,  the
          Contractor is responsible  for having  analytical documentation
          ascertaining that the purity of each  compound is correctly stated.
          Purity confirmation, when  performed,  should use either differential
          scanning calorimetry, gas  chromatography with flame ionization
          detection,  high performance liquid chromatography,  infrared
          spectrometry, or other  appropriate techniques.   Use of two or more
          independent methods is  recommended.  The correction factor for
          impurity when weighing  neat materials in the preparation of solution
          standards is:

          Equation 1

                                         weight of pure compound

          weight of impure compound  —    (percent purity/100)

          where "weight of pure compound" is that required to prepare a
          specific volume of a solution standard of a specified concentration.


           **"                        E-18                              DFLMOL.1  (9/91)

-------
      3.  Mis-identification of compounds occasionally occurs and it is
         possible that a mislabeled compound may be received from a chemical
         supply house.  The Contractor is responsible for having analytical
         documentation ascertaining that all compounds used in the
         preparation of solution standards are correctly identified.
         Identification confirmation, when performed, should use gas
         chromatographic/mass spectrometry analysis on at least two different
         analytical columns, or other appropriate techniques.

      4.  Calculate the weight of material to be weighed out for a specified
         volume taking into account the purity of the compound and the
         desired concentration.  A second person must verify the accuracy of
         the calculations.  Check balances for accuracy with a set of
         standard weights.  All weighing should be performed on an analytical
         balance to the nearest 0.1 mg and verified by a second person.  The
         solvent used to dissolve the solute should be compatible with the
         protocol in which the standard is to be used; the solute should be
         soluble, stable, and nonreactive with the solvent.  In the case of a
         multicomponent solution, the components must not react with each
         other.

      5.  Transfer the solute to a volumetric flask, and dilute to the
         specified solution volume with solvent after ensuring dissolution of
         the solute in the solvent.  Sonication or warming may be performed
         to promote dissolution of the solute.  This solution is to be called
         the primary standard, and all subsequent dilutions must be traceable
         back to the primary standard.

      6.  Log notebooks are to be kept for all weighing and dilutions.  All
         subsequent dilutions from the primary standard and the calculations
         for determining their concentrations are to be recorded and verified
         by a second person.  All solution standards are to be refrigerated
         when not in use.  All solution standards are to be clearly labeled
         as to the identity of the compound(s), concentration, date prepared,
         solvent, and initials of the preparer.

C.    Purchase of Chemical  Standards  Already  in  Solution

      Solutions of analytical  reference  standards  can be purchased by the
      Contractor provided they meet  the  following  criteria:

      1.  Laboratories must maintain the following documentation to verify the
         integrity of the standard solutions they purchase:

         a.   Mass spectral identification confirmation of the neat material.

         b.   Purity confirmation of.the neat material.

         c.   Chromatographic and quantitative documentation that the
              solution standard was QC-checked according to the following
              section.

      2.  The Contractor must purchase standards for which the quality is
         demonstrated statistically and analytically by a method of the
         supplier's choice.  One way quality can be demonstrated is to
         prepare and analyze three solutions; a high standard, a low

           z<-
                                     E-19                              DFLM01.0

-------
standard, and a standard at the target concentration (see parts a
and b below) .  The supplier must then demonstrate that the
analytical results for the high standard and low standard are
consistent with the difference in theoretical concentrations by
using the Student's t-test in part d.  If this consistency is
achieved, the supplier must then demonstrate that the concentration
of the target standard lies midway between the concentrations of the
low and high standards by using the Student's t-test in part e.
Thus, the standard is certified to be within 10 percent of the
target concentration.

If the above procedure is used, the supplier must document that the
following have been achieved:

a.   Two solutions of identical concentration must be prepared
     independently from neat materials.   An aliquot of the first
     solution must be diluted to the intended concentration (the
     "target standard") .   One aliquot is taken from the second
     solution and diluted to a concentration 10 percent greater than
     the target standard.  This aliquot is called the "high
     standard."  One further aliquot is taken from the second
     solution and diluted to a concentration 10 percent less that
     the target standard.  This aliquot is called the "low
     standard. "

b.   Six replicate analyses of each standard (a total of 18
     analyses) must be performed in the following sequence: low
     standard, target standard, high standard, low standard, target
     standard, high standard,  . . .

c.   The mean and variance of the six results for each solution must
     be calculated.

Equation 2
     MEAN  -  (Y! + Y2 + Y3 + Y4 + Y5 + Y6 )/6
Equation 3
     VARIANCE  -  (YX2 + Y22 + Y32 + Y42 + Y52 + Y62 - (6*MEAN)2)/5
     The values Yj_, Y2, Y3 ..... represent the results of the six
     analyses of each standard.  The means of the low, target and
     high standards are designated M]_, M2 and 113, respectively.  The
     variances of the low, target and high standards are designated
     V^, V2 and V3, respectively.  Additionally, a pooled variance,
     Vp, is calculated.

Equation 4
     vp -  (Vi/(0.81) + V2 + V3 /(1.21))/3

     If the square root of Vp  is less than one percent of M2 , then
     M22 /10.000 is to be used as the value of Vp in all subsequent
     calculations .
                            E-20                              DFIH01.0

-------
          d.   The  test  statistic must be calculated:

              Equation  5
              TEST STATISTIC  -   | (M3 /l.l)  -  (Mj. /0.9)|/(Vp /3)°'5

              If the  test  statistic exceeds  2.13, the supplier has failed to
              demonstrate  a twenty percent difference between the high  and
              low  standards.  In such a case,  the standards are not
              acceptable.

          e.   The  test  statistic must be calculated:

              Equation  6
              TEST STATISTIC  -   |M2 -  (Hi /I.8) -  (M3 /2.2)|/(Vp /4)°'5

              If the  test  statistic exceeds  2.13, the supplier has failed to
              demonstrate  that the target standard  concentration is midway
              between the  high and low standards.   In such a case, the
              standards are not acceptable.

          f.   The  95  percent  confidence intervals for the mean result of  each
              standard  must be calculated:

              Equation  7
              Interval  for Low Standard  -   MX ± (2.13)(Vp /6)°'5

              Equation  8
              Interval  for Target  Standard   -  M2 ± (2.13)(Vp /6)°'5

              Equation  9
              Interval  for High Standard  -  M3 ± (2.13)(Vp /6)°'5

              These intervals must not overlap.  If overlap is observed,  the
              supplier  has failed  to demonstrate the ability to discriminate
              the  10  percent  difference in concentrations.  In such a case,
              the  standards are not acceptable.

      In any event, the Contractor is responsible for the quality of the
      standards employed for analyses under this contract.

D.   Requesting Standards From the EPA Standards Repository

     Solutions of analytical  reference  materials can be  ordered from the U.S.
     EPA Chemical Standards Repository,  depending on availability.   The
     Contractor can place an  order for  standards only after demonstrating
     that these standards are not available  from commercial vendors either in
     solution or as a neat material.

E.   Documentation of the Verification  and Preparation of Chemical Standards

     Each laboratory is  responsible for maintaining  the  necessary
     documentation to  show that the chemical  standards  they have  used in the
     performance of CLP  analysis  conform to  the requirements previously
     listed.   Weighing logbooks,  calculations,  chromatograms,  mass spectra,
           -}«-
                                     E-21                             DFLM01.0

-------
etc, whether produced by the laboratory or purchased from chemical
supply houses, must be maintained by the laboratory and may be subject
to review during on-site inspections.   Documentation of standards
preparation may be required to be sent to EPA for verification of
contract compliance.  In those cases where the documentation is
supportive of the analytical results of data packages sent to EPA,  such
documentation is to be kept o.i file by the laboratory for a period of
one year.
                                E-22                              DFLM01.0

-------
                                  SECTION VI
                         CONTRACT  COMPLIANCE SCREENING
Contract Compliance Screening (CCS) is one aspect of tue Government's
contractual right of inspection of analytical data. CCS examines the
Contractor's adherence to the contract requirements based on the sample data
package delivered to EPA.

CCS is performed by SMO under the direction of the EPA.  To assure a uniform
review, a set of standardized procedures have been developed to evaluate the
sample data package submitted by a Contractor against the technical and
completeness requirements of the contract.

CCS results are mailed to the Contractor and all other data recipients.  The
Contractor has a period of time to correct deficiencies.  The Contractor must
send all corrections to the Regional client, EMSL-LV and SMO.

CCS results are used in conjunction with other information to measure overall
Contractor performance and to take appropriate actions to correct
deficiencies in performance.
                                     E-23                              DFLM01.0

-------
                                 SECTION VII
                             REGIONAL DATA REVIEW
Contract laboratory data are generated to meet the specific needs of the
Regions. In order to verify the usability of data for the intended purpose,
each Region reviews data from the perspective of end-user, based upon
functional aspects of data quality.  General guidelines for data review have
been developed jointly by the Region and the NPO.  Each Region uses these
guidelines as the basis for data evaluation.  Individual Regions may augment
the basic guideline review process with additional review based on Region-
specific or site-specific concerns.  Regional reviews, like the sites under
investigation, vary based on the nature of the problems under investigation
and the Regional response appropriate to the specific circumstances.

Regional data reviews, relating usability of the data to a specific site, are
part of the collective assessment process.  They complement the review done
at SMO, which is designed to identify contractual discrepancies, and the
review done at EMSL-LV which is designed to evaluate Contractor and method
performance.  These individual evaluations are integrated into a collective
review that is necessary for program and laboratory administration and
management and may be used to take appropriate action to correct deficiencies
in the Contractor's performance.
                                      E-24                             DFLM01.0

-------
                                 SECTION VIII
                        LABORATORY EVALUATION SAMPLES
Although intralaboratory QC may demonstrate Contractor and method performance
that can be tracked over time, an external performance evaluation program is
an essential feature of a QA program.  As a means of measuring Contractor and
method performance, Contractors participate in interlaboratory comparison
studies conducted by the EPA.  Results from the analysis of laboratory
evaluation samples will be used by the EPA to verify the Contractor's
continuing ability to produce acceptable analytical data. The results are
also used to assess the precision and accuracy of the analytical methods for
specific analytes.

Sample sets may be provided to participating Contractors as frequently as on
a SDG-by-SDG basis as a recognizable QC sample of known composition, as a
recognizable QC sample of unknown composition, or not recognizable as a QC
material.  Laboratory evaluation samples may be sent either by the Regional
client or the NPO and may be used for contract action.

Contractors are required to analyze the samples and return the data package
and all raw data within the contract required turnaround time.

At a minimum, the results are evaluated for compound identification,
quantification, and sample contamination.  Confidence intervals for the
quantification of target compounds are based on reported values using
population statistics.  EPA may adjust the scores on any given laboratory
evaluation sample to compensate for unanticipated difficulties with a
particular sample.  Normally, a fraction of the compounds spiked into the
sample are not specifically listed in the contract.

A Contractor's results on the laboratory evaluation samples will determine
the Contractor's performance as follows:

1.   Acceptable,  No Response Required (Score greater than or equal to 90
     percent):

     Data meets most or all of the scoring criteria.  No response is
     required.

2.   Acceptable,  Response Explaining Deficiency(ies) Required (Score greater
     than or equal to 75 percent but less than 90 percent):

     Deficiencies exist in the Contractor's performance.

     Within 14 days of receipt of notification from EPA, the Contractor shall
     describe the deficiency(ies) and the action(s) taken to correct the
     deficiency(ies) in a letter to the APO, the TPO and EMSL-LV.
                                     E-25        '                      DFLM01.0

-------
3.   Unacceptable Performance,  Response Explaining  Deficiency(ies)  Required
     (Score less than 75 percent):

     Deficiencies exist in the  Contractor's  performance  to  the  extent that
     the NPO has determined that the Contractor has not  demonstrated the
     capability to meet the contract requirements.

     Within 14 days of receipt  of notification from EPA,  the Contractor shall
     describe the deficiency(ies)  and the action(s) taken to correct the
     deficiency(ies) in a letter to the APO,  the  TPO and EMSL-LV.

     The Contractor shall be notified by the APO  or TPO  concerning  the remedy
     for their unacceptable performance.  A  Contractor may  expect,  but EPA  is
     not limited to, the following actions:   reduction of the number of
     samples sent under the contract, suspension  of sample  shipment to the
     Contractor, an on-site audit,  a full data audit,  analysis  of remedial  PE
     samples, and/or a contract sanction, such as a Cure Notice.

     NOTE:    A  Contractor's prompt response demonstrating that corrective
             actions have been taken to  ensure the Contractor's capability to
             meet contract requirements will facilitate continuation of full
             sample delivery.
                                     E-26                              DFLM01.0

-------
                                  SECTION IX
                              GC/MS TAPE AUDITS


Periodically, EPA requests from Contractors the GC/MS magnetic tapes
corresponding to a specific Case in order to accomplish tape audits.
Generally, tape submissions and audits are requested for the following
reasons:

      o   Program overview.
      o   Indication of data quality problems  from EMSL-LV,  SMO,  or Regional
          data reviews.

      o   Support for on-site audits.

      o   Specific Regional  requests.

Depending upon the reason for an audit, the tapes from a recent Case, a
specific Case, or a laboratory evaluation sample may be requested.  Tape
audits provide a mechanism to assess adherence to contractual requirements
and ensure the consistency of data reported on the hardcopy forms with that
generated on the GC/MS tapes.  This function provides external monitoring of
CLP QC requirements and checks adherence of the Contractor to internal QA
procedures.  In addition, tape audits enable EPA to evaluate the utility,
precision and accuracy of the analytical methods.

The GC/MS tape shall include raw data and quantitation reports for samples,
blanks, laboratory evaluation samples, initial calibrations, and continuing
calibrations associated with the SDG requested.  The specific requirements
for submissions of GC/MS tapes are discussed in Exhibit B.

Upon request of the APO or EMSL-LV, the required tapes and all necessary
documentation shall be submitted to EPA within seven days of notification.
                                     E-27                              DFLM01.0

-------
                                  SECTION X
                        ON-SITE LABORATORY EVALUATIONS


At a frequency dictated by a Contractor's performance, the APO, TPO or their
authorized representative will conduct an on-site laboratory evaluation.  On-
site laboratory evaluations are carried out to monitor the Contractor's
ability to meet selected terms and conditions specified in the contract.  The
evaluation process incorporates two separate categories:   a QA evaluation and
an evidentiary audit.

A.    Quality Assurance Evaluation

      QA evaluators inspect the Contractor's facilities to verify the
      adequacy and maintenance of instrumentation, the continuity of
      personnel meeting experience or education requirements, and the
      acceptable performance of analytical and QC procedures.  The Contractor
      should expect that items to be monitored will include, but not be
      limited to, the following items:

          o    Size  and  appearance of  the  facility.

          o    Quantity,  age,  availability,  scheduled  maintenance  and
               performance  of  instrumentation.

          o    Availability, appropriateness,  and utilization of SOPs.

          o    Staff qualifications, experience,  and personnel training
               programs.

          o    Reagents,  standards,  and  sample storage facilities.

          o    Standard  preparation  logbooks and  raw data.

          o    Bench sheets and analytical logbook maintenance and review.

          o    Review of the Contractor's  sample  analysis/data package
               inspection procedures.

      Prior to an on-site  evaluation, various documentation pertaining to
      performance of  the specific Contractor  is  integrated in a profile
      package  for discussion during the evaluation.   Items that may be
      included are previous on-site reports,  laboratory evaluation sample
      scores,  Regional review  of data, Regional  QA materials, GC/MS tape
      audit reports,  results of CCS, and  date trend reports.

B.    Evidentiary Audit

      Evidence auditors  conduct an  on-site  laboratory evaluation  to determine
      if  laboratory policies and procedures are  in place to  satisfy evidence
      handling requirements as stated in  Exhibit F.   The evidence audit is
      comprised of  the  following three activities:

           **"                        E-28                             DFLM01.0

-------
1.    Procedural Audit

      The procedural audit consists of review and examination of actual SOPs
      and accompanying documentation for the following laboratory operations:
      sample receiving, sample storage, sample identification, sample
      security, sample tracking (from receipt to completion of analysis),  and
      analytical project file organization and assembly.

2.    Written SOPs Audit

      The written SOPs audit consists of review and examination of the
      written SOPs to determine if they are accurate and complete for the
      following laboratory operations:  sample receiving, sample storage,
      sample identification, sample security, sample tracking (from receipt
      to completion of analysis),  and analytical project file organization
      and assembly.

3.    Analytical Project File Evidence Audit

      The analytical project file evidence audit consists of review and
      examination of the analytical project file documentation.  The auditors
      review the files to determine:

          o  Accuracy  of the document  inventory.

          o  Completeness of the file.
          o  Adequacy  and accuracy of  the document numbering  system.

          o  Traceability of sample activity.

          o  Identification of activity recorded on the  documents.

          o  Error correction methods.

C.    Discussion of the On-Site Team's Findings

      The QA and evidentiary auditors  discuss their findings with the APO/TPO
      prior to debriefing the Contractor.  During the debriefing, the
      auditors present their findings  and recommendations for corrective
      actions necessary to  the Contractor personnel.

D.    Corrective Action Reports For Follow-Through to Quality Assurance and
      Evidentiary Audit Reports

      Following an on-site  evaluation, QA and evidentiary audit reports which
      discuss deficiencies  found during the on-site evaluation will be
      forwarded to the Contractor.  The Contractor must  discuss the
      corrective actions taken to resolve the deficiencies discussed during
      the on-site visit and discussed  in the on-site reports  in a letter to
      the APO, TPO, EMSL-LV (response  to the QA report)  and NEIC (response to
      the evidentiary  report) within 14 days of receipt  of the finding or
      within the time  agreed upon between the APO/TPO and the Contractor.  If
      SOPs are required to  be written  or amended, the Contractor must provide
                                     E-29                              DFLM01.0

-------
the SOPs to the TPO, EMSL-LV (QA/technical SOPs) and NEIC (evidentiary
SOPs) within 30 days of receipt of the finding or within the time
agreed upon between the APO/TPO and the Contractor.

If the Contractor fails to take appropriate corrective action to
resolve the deficiencies discussed in the on-site reports, a Contractor
may expect, but the Government is not limited to, the following
actions:  reduction of the number of samples sent under the contract,
suspension of sample shipment to the Contractor, a follow-up site
visit, a full data audit, analysis of remedial PE samples and/or
contract sanction, such as a Cure Notice.
                                E-30              ,               DFLM01.0

-------
                                  SECTION XI
                  QUALITY ASSURANCE AND DATA TREND ANALYSIS


Data submitted by laboratories are subject to review from several aspects:
compliance with contract-required QC,  usability,  and full data package
evaluation.  Problems resulting from any of these reviews may determine the
need for a GC/MS tape audit, an on-site laboratory evaluation and/or a
remedial laboratory evaluation sample.  In addition, QC prescribed in the
methods provides information that is continually used by EPA to assess sample
data quality, Contractor data quality and CLP data quality via data trend
analysis.   Trend analysis is accomplished by entering data into a
computerized database.  Statistical reports that evaluate specific anomalies
or disclose trends in many areas, including the following, are generated from
this database:

      o   Internal standard  recovery.

      o   Laboratory evaluation sample.

      o   Blanks.

      o   Gas chromatographic resolution of analytes.

      o   Initial  and continuing calibration data.
      o   Other QC and method parameters.

Program-wide statistical results are used to rank laboratories in order to
observe the relative performance of each Contractor using a given protocol
against its peers.  The reports are also used to identify trends within
laboratories.  The results of many of these trends analyses are included in
overall evaluation of a Contractor's performance, and are reviewed to
determine if corrective action or an on-site laboratory evaluation is
indicated in order to meet the QA/QC requirements of the contract.

Contractor performance over time is monitored using these trend analysis
techniques to detect departures of Contractor output from required or desired
levels of QC, and to provide an early warning of Contractor QA/QC problems
which may not be apparent from the results of an individual case.

As a further benefit to the CLP, the database provides the information needed
to establish performance-based criteria in updated analytical protocols,
where advisory criteria has been previously used.  The vast empirical data
set produced by contract laboratories is carefully analyzed, with the results
augmenting theoretical and research-based performance criteria.  The result
is a continuously monitored set of QC and performance criteria specifications
of what is routinely achievable and expected of environmental chemistry
laboratories in mass production analysis of environmental samples.  This
information, in turn, assists EPA in meeting its objectives of obtaining data
of known and documented quality.
                                     E-31                              DFLM01.0

-------
                                 SECTION XII
                               DATA MANAGEMENT
Data management procedures are defined as procedures specifying the
acquisition or entry, update, correction, deletion,  storage and security of
computer-readable data and files.  These procedures should be in written form
and contain a clear definition for all databases and files used to generate
or resubmit deliverables.   Key areas of concern include:  system organization
(including personnel and security), documentation operations, traceability
and QC.

Data manually entered from hardcopy must be quality controlled and the error
rates estimated.  Systems should prevent entry of incorrect or out-of-range
data and alert data entry personnel of errors.  In addition, data entry error
rates must be estimated and recorded on a monthly basis by reentering a
statistical sample of the data entered and calculating discrepancy rates by
data element.

The record of changes in the form of corrections and updates to data
originally generated, submitted, and/or resubmitted must be documented to
allow traceability of updates.  Documentation must include the following for
each change:

      o   Justification or rationale for the change.

      o   Initials of the  person making the change or changes.   Data changes
          must be implemented and reviewed by a person or group independent of
          the source generating the deliverable.

      o   Change documentation must be retained according to the schedule of
          the original deliverable.

      o   Resubmitted deliverables must be reinspected as a part of the
          laboratory's internal inspection process prior to resubmission.  The
          entire deliverable, not just the changes,  must be inspected.
      o   The Laboratory Manager must approve changes to originally submitted
          deliverables.

      o   Documentation of data changes may be requested by laboratory
          auditors.

Life cycle management procedures must be applied  to  computer software  systems
developed by the  laboratory  to be  used  to generate and  edit contract
deliverables.   Such  systems  must be thoroughly tested and  documented prior  to
utilization.

      o   A software test and acceptance plan including test requirements,
          test results and acceptance criteria must be developed, followed,
          and available in written form.

      o   System changes must not be made directly to production systems
          generating deliverables.  Changes must be made first to a
          development system and tested prior to implementation.


           *"                        E-32                              DFLM01.0

-------
      o   Each version of  the production  system will be given an
          identification number,  a  date of  installation, and a date of last
          operation,  and will be  archived.
      o   System and  operations documentation must be developed and maintained
          for each  system.   Documentation must include a user's manual and an
          operations  and maintenance manual.
Individual(s)  responsible for the following functions  must be  identified:

      o   System operation and maintenance  including documentation and
          training.
      o   Database  integrity, including data entry, data updating and quality
          control.
      o   Data and  system  security, backup  and archiving.
                                     E-33                              DFLM01.0

-------
                                 REFERENCES
1.  Fisk, J.F. and Manzo, S.M.  "Quality Assurance/Quality Control in
    Organics Analysis," Proceedings from the Water Pollution Control
    Federation Meeting, May 1986.

2.  Office of Monitoring Systems and Quality Assurance, U.S. Environmental
    Protection Agency, "Interim Guidelines and Specifications for Preparing
    Quality Assurance Project Plans," QAMS-005/80, December 1980.

3.  Office of Solid Waste and Emergency Response, U.S. Environmental
    Protection Agency, Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste, Third
    Edition, SW-846, November 1986.

4.  Laidlaw, R.H., "Document Control and Chain of Custody Considerations for
    the National  Contract Laboratory Program," Quality Control in Remedial
    Site  Investigations:  Hazardous and Industrial Solid Waste Testing,
    Fifth Volume, ASTM STP 925, C.L. Perket, ed., American Society for
    Testing and Materials, Philadelphia, 1986.

5.  Health Effects Research Laboratory, U.S. Environmental Protection
    Agency, Manual of Analytical Methods for the Analysis of Pesticides in
    Humans and Environmental Samples, EPA-600/8-80-036, June 1980.

6.  Environmental Protection Agency, "Guidelines Establishing Test
    Procedures for the Analysis of Pollutants Under the Glean Water Act;
    Final Rule and Interim Final Rule and Proposed Rule," 40 CFR Part 136,
    Federal Register, Vol. 49, No. 209, pp. 43234-43442, October 26, 1984.

7.  Health Effects Research Laboratory, U.S. Environmental Protection
    Agency, Manual of Analytical Quality Control for  Pesticides and Related
    Compounds in  Human and Environmental Samples-Second Revision, EPA-600/2-
    81-059, April 1981.

8.  Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory, U.S.  Environmental
    Protection Agency, Analytical Reference Standards and Supplemental Data:
    The  Pesticides and Industrial Chemicals Repository, EPA-600/4-84-082,
    October  1984.

9.  American Chemical Society Committee on Environmental Improvement, and
    Subcommittee  on  Environmental Analytical Chemistry, "Guidelines  for Data
    Acquisition and  Data Quality Evaluation  in  Environmental Chemistry,"
    Analytical Chemistry, Volume 52, Number  14,  December 1980.

10. Moore, J.M. and  Pearson, J.G.   "Quality Assurance Support  for  the
    Superfund Contract Laboratory  Program," Quality  Control in Remedial Site
    Investigation:   Hazardous and  Industrial Solid Waste Testing,  Fifth
    Volume,  ASTM  STP 925,  C.L.  Perket,  ed., American Society for Testing and
    Materials,  Philadelphia,  1986.
                                     E-34                              DFLM01.0

-------
             EXHIBIT F
CHAIN-OF-CUSTODY, DOCUMENT CONTROL,
 AND STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES
                                                DFLM01.0

-------
                              Table of Contents






                                                                        Page




1.   Sample Chain-of-Custody	    F-3




2.   Document Control Procedures	    F-5




3.   Specifications for Written Standard Operating Procedures	    F-7




4.   Handling of Confidential Information	    F-9
                                    F-2                              DFLM01.0

-------
1.    Sample Chain-of-Custodv

      A sample is physical evidence collected from a facility or from the
      environment.  Controlling evidence is an essential part of the
      hazardous waste investigation effort.  To accomplish this task,
      Contractors are required to develop and implement the following sample
      identification, chain-of-custody,  sample receiving,  and sample tracking
      procedures.

1.1   Sample Identification

      To assure traceability of the samples while in the possession of the
      Contractor, the Contractor shall have a specified method for
      maintaining identification of samples throughout the laboratory.  Each
      sample and sample preparation container shall be labeled with the EPA
      number or a unique laboratory identifier.  If a unique laboratory
      identifier is used,  it shall be cross-referenced to the EPA number.

1.2   Chain-of-Custody Procedures

      Because of the nature of the data being collected, the custody of EPA
      samples must be traceable from the time the samples are collected until
      they are introduced as evidence in legal proceedings.  The Contractor
      shall have procedures ensuring that EPA sample custody is maintained
      and documented.  A sample is under custody if:

          o  It is in your possession, or

          o  It is in your view after being in your possession, or

          o  It was  in your possession and you locked it up, or

          o  It is in a designated secure area.  (Secure areas shall be
             accessible only to authorized personnel.)

1.3   Sample Receiving Procedures

      1.3.1   The Contractor shall designate  a sample custodian responsible
              for receiving all samples.

      1.3.2   The Contractor shall designate  a representative  to  receive
              samples in  the event that  the sample  custodian is not
              available.

      1.3.3   The condition of the shipping containers  and  sample bottles
              shall  be  inspected upon receipt by the sample custodian or
              his/her representative.

      1.3.4   The condition of the custody seals (intact/not intact)  shall be
              inspected upon receipt by  the sample  custodian or his/her
              representative.

      1.3.5   The sample  custodian or his/her representative shall check for
              the presence or absence of the  following  documents  accompanying
              the sample  shipment:
                                   F-3                              DFLM01.0

-------
                   o   Airbills or airbill stickers
                   o   Custody seals

                   o   EPA custody records

                   o   Sample Traffic Reports or SAS Packing Lists

                   o   Sample tags

     1.3.6    The sample custodian or his/her representative shall sign and
              date all forms (e.g.,  custody records,  Traffic Reports or
              Packing Lists, and airbills)  accompanying the samples at the
              time of sample receipt.

     1.3.7    The Contractor shall contact  the Sample Management Office (SMO)
              to resolve discrepancies and  problems such as absent documents,
              conflicting information, broken custody seals, and
              unsatisfactory sample condition (e.g.,  leaking sample bottle).

     1.3.8    The Contractor shall record the resolution of discrepancies and
              problems on Telephone Contact Logs.

     1.3.9    The following information shall be recorded on Form DC-1 (see
              Exhibit B) by the sample custodian or his/her representative as
              samples are received and inspected:

                   o   Condition of  the shipping container.
                   o   Presence or absence and condition of  custody seals  on
                      shipping and/or sample containers.

                   o   Custody seal  numbers, when present.

                   o   Condition of  the sample bottles.

                   o   Presence or absence of airbills  or airbill  stickers.

                   o   Airbill or airbill sticker numbers.
                   o   Presence or absence of EPA custody records.
                   o   Presence or absence of Traffic Reports or SAS Packing
                      Lists.
                   o   Presence or absence of sample  tags.
                   o   Sample tag  identification numbers cross-referenced to
                      the  EPA sample numbers.

                   o   Verification  of agreement or non-agreement of
                      information recorded  on  shipping documents and sample
                      containers.

                   o  Problems  or discrepancies.

1.4   Sample Tracking Procedures

      The Contractor  shall maintain records documenting all phases of sample
      handling from receipt to final analysis.
                                   F-4                               DFLM01.0

-------
2.    pnfMimt»nt Control Procedures

      The goal of the laboratory document control program is to assure that
      all documents for a specified Sample Delivery Group (SDG) will be
      accounted for when the project is completed.  Accountable documents
      used by contract laboratories shall include, but not be limited to,
      logbooks, chain-of-custody records, sample work sheets, bench sheets,
      and other documents relating to the sample or sample analysis.  The
      following document control procedures have been established to ensure
      that all laboratory records are assembled and stored for delivery to
      EPA or are available upon request from EPA prior to the delivery
      schedule.

2.1   Preprinted Laboratory Forms and Logbooks

      2.1.1    All  documents produced by  the Contractor that  are directly
               related to  the preparation and  analysis of EPA samples  shall
               become  the  property  of EPA and  shall be placed in the Complete
               SDG  File (CSF).  All observations  and  results  recorded  by  the
               laboratory  but not on preprinted  laboratory forms shall be
               entered into permanent laboratory logbooks.  When all data from
               a SDG are compiled,  all  original  laboratory forms and copies of
               all  SDG-related  logbook  entries shall  be included in the
               documentation package.

      2.1.2    The  Contractor shall identify the activity recorded on  all
               laboratory  documents that  are directly related to the
               preparation and  analysis of EPA samples.

      2.1.3    Pre-printed laboratory forms shall contain the name of  the
               laboratory  and be  dated  (month/day/year) and signed by  the
               person responsible for performing the  activity at the time an
               activity is performed.

      2.1.4    Logbook entries  shall be dated  (month/day/year) and signed by
               the  person responsible for performing  the  activity  at the  time
               an activity is performed.

      2.1.5    Logbook entries  shall be in chronological  order. Entries  in
               logbooks, with  the exception of instrument run logs and
               extraction logs, shall include  only one SDG per page.

      2.1.6    Pages in both bound  and  unbound logbooks shall be  sequentially
               numbered.

      2.1.7    Instrument run logs  shall  be maintained so as to enable a
               reconstruction of the run sequence of individual instruments.
               Because the laboratory must provide copies of the instrument
               run logs to EPA, the laboratory may exercise the option of
               using only laboratory or EPA sample identification numbers in
               the  logs for sample  ID rather  than government agency or
               commercial client names  to preserve the confidentiality of
               commercial clients.
                                    F-5                              DFLM01.0

-------
      2.1.8   Corrections to supporting documents and raw data shall be made
              by drawing a single line through the error and entering the
              correct information. Corrections and additions to supporting
              documents and raw data shall be dated and initialed.  No
              information shall be obliterated or rendered unreadable.

              All notations shall be recorded in ink.  Unused portions of
              documents shall be "z'd" out.

2.2   Consistency of Documentation

      The Contractor shall assign a Document Control Officer (DCO)
      responsible for the organization and assembly of the CSF.   All copies
      of laboratory documents shall be complete  and legible.

      Original documents which include information relating to more than one
      SDG shall be filed in the CSF of the lowest SDG number.   The copy(ies)
      shall be placed in the other CSF(s),  and the Contractor shall record
      the following information on the copy(ies) in red ink:
            "COPY - ORIGINAL IS FILED IN CSF
      The Contractor shall sign and date this addition to the copy(ies).

      Before releasing analytical results,  the DCO shall assemble and cross-
      check the information on samples tags,  custody records, lab bench
      sheets, personal and instrument logs,  and other relevant deliverables
      to ensure that data pertaining to each particular sample or SDG are
      consistent throughout the CSF.

2.3   Document Numbering and Inventory Procedure

      In order to provide document accountability of the completed analysis
      records, each item in the CSF shall be inventoried and assigned a
      serialized number as described in Exhibit B.

      All documents relevant to each SDG, including logbook pages, bench
      sheets, mass spectra, chromatograms,  screening records, re-preparation
      records, reanalysis records, records of failed or attempted analysis,
      custody records, library research results, etc., shall be inventoried.

      The DCO shall be responsible for ensuring that all documents generated
      are placed in the CSF for inventory and are delivered to the
      appropriate EPA Region or other receiver as designated by EPA.  The DCO
      shall place the sample tags in plastic bags in the file.

2.4   Storage of EPA Files

      The Contractor shall maintain EPA laboratory documents in a secure
      location.
                                    F-6                              DFLM01.0

-------
2.5   Shipment of Deliverables

      The Contractor shall document shipment of deliverables packages to the
      recipients.  These shipments require custody seals on the containers
      placed such that the containers cannot be opened without damaging or
      breaking the seal.  The Contractor shall document what was sent,  to
      whom, the date, and the method (carrier) used.   A copy of the
      transmittal letter for the CSF shall be sent to the National
      Enforcement Investigations Center and SMO.

3.    Specifications for Written Standard Operating Procedures

      The Contractor shall have written standard operating procedures (SOPs)
      for receipt of samples, maintenance of custody, sample identification,
      sample storage, sample tracking, and assembly of completed data.   A SOP
      is defined as a written narrative stepwise description of laboratory
      operating procedures including examples of laboratory documents.   The
      SOPs shall accurately describe the actual procedures used in the
      laboratory, and copies of the written SOPs shall be available to the
      appropriate laboratory personnel.  These procedures are necessary to
      ensure that analytical data produced under this contract are acceptable
      for use in EPA enforcement case preparation and litigation.  The
      Contractor's SOPs shall provide mechanisms and documentation to meet
      each of the following specifications and shall be used by EPA as the
      basis for laboratory evidence audits.

3.1   The Contractor shall have written SOPs describing the sample
      custodian's duties and responsibilities.

3.2   The Contractor shall have written SOPs for receiving and logging in of
      the samples.  The procedures shall include, but not be limited to,
      documenting the following information:

      3.2.1    Presence  or absence  of EPA chain-of-custody forms.

      3.2.2    Presence  or absence  of airbills or airbill  stickers.

      3.2.3    Presence  or absence  of Traffic  Reports or SAS  Packing  Lists.

      3.2.4    Presence  or absence  of custody  seals on shipping and/or  sample
               containers  and their condition.

      3.2.5    Custody seal numbers,  when present.

      3.2.6    Airbill or  airbill  sticker numbers.

      3.2.7    Presence  or absence  of sample tags.

      3.2.8    Sample tag  ID numbers.

      3.2.9    Condition of the shipping container.

      3.2.10   Condition of the sample bottles.


           *-                        F-7                              DFLM01.0

-------
      3.2.11  Verification of agreement or non-agreement of information on
              receiving documents and sample containers.

      3.2.12  Resolution of problems or discrepancies with SMO.

      3.2.13  An explanation of any terms used by the laboratory to describe
              sample condition upon receipt (e.g., good,  fine, OK).

3.3   The Contractor shall have written SOPs for maintaining identification
      of EPA samples throughout the laboratory.   If the Contractor assigns
      unique laboratory identifiers,  written SOPs shall include a description
      of the method used to assign the unique laboratory  identifier and shall
      include a description of the document used to cross-reference the
      unique laboratory identifier to the EPA sample number..  If the
      Contractor uses prefixes or suffixes in addition to sample
      identification numbers,  the written SOPs shall include their
      definitions.

3.4   The Contractor shall have written SOPs describing all storage areas for
      samples in the laboratory.  The SOPs shall include  a list of authorized
      personnel who have access or keys to secure storage areas.

3.5   The Contractor shall have written SOPs describing the method by which
      the laboratory maintains samples under custody.

3.6   The Contractor shall have written SOPs describing the method by which
      the laboratory maintains the security of any areas  identified as
      secure.

3.7   The Contractor shall have written SOPs for tracking the work performed
      on any particular samples.  The tracking SOP shall  include:

          o  A description of the documents used to record sample receipt,
             sample storage, sample transfers, sample preparations, and
             sample analyses.

          o  A description of the documents used to record calibration and
             QA/QC laboratory work.
          o  Examples of document formats and laboratory documents used in
             the sample receipt, sample storage, sample transfer, and sample
             analyses.

          o  A narrative step-wise description of how documents  are used  to
             track samples.

3.8   The Contractor shall have written SOPs for organization and assembly of
      all documents relating to each SDG.  Documents shall be filed on a  SDG-
      specific basis.  The procedures shall ensure that all documents
      including logbook pages, sample tracking records, chromatographic
      charts, computer printouts, raw data summaries, correspondence, and any
      other written documents having reference to the SDG are compiled in one
      location for submission to EPA.  The written SOPs shall include:

          o  A description of the numbering and  inventory method.


           —                       F-8                              DFLM01.0

-------
          o  A description of the method used by the laboratory to verify
             consistency and completeness of the CSF.
          o  Procedures for the shipment of deliverables packages using
             custody seals.
4.    Handling of Confidential Information

      A Contractor conducting work under this contract may receive
      confidential information from EPA.  Confidential information must be
      handled separately from other documentation developed under this
      contract.  To accomplish this, the following procedures for the
      handling of confidential information have been established.

4.1   All confidential documents shall be under the supervision of a
      designated DCO.

4.2   Any samples or information received with a request of confidentiality
      shall be handled as "confidential."  A separate locked file shall be
      maintained to store this information and shall be segregated from other
      nonconfidential information.  Data generated from confidential samples
      shall be treated as confidential.  Upon receipt of confidential
      information, the DCO will log these documents into a Confidential
      Inventory Log.  The information will then be available to authorized
      personnel but only after it has been signed out to that person by the
      DCO.  The documents shall be returned to the locked file at the
      .conclusion of each working day.  Confidential information may not be
      reproduced except upon approval by the Technical Project Officer and
      Administrative Project Officer.  The DCO will enter all copies into the
      document control system described above.  In addition, this information
      may not be disposed of except upon approval by the Technical Project
      Officer and Administrative Project Officer.  The DCO shall remove and
      retain the cover page of any confidential information disposed of for
      one year and shall keep a record on the disposition in the Confidential
      Inventory Log.
                                    F-9                              DFLM01.0

-------
EXHIBIT G
GLOSSARY
                                   DFLM01.0

-------
                                   GLOSSARY
ALIQUOT - a measured portion of a sample taken for analysis.

ANALYSIS DATE/TIME - the date and military time of the injection of the
sample, standard or blank into the GC/MS or GC system.

BLANK - see Method Blank.

CASE - a finite, usually predetermined number of samples collected over a
given time period from a particular site.  Case numbers are assigned by the
Sample Management Office.  A Case consists of one or more Sample Delivery
Groups.

CONCENTRATION CALIBRATION SOLUTION (Table 3) - solutions (tridecane)
containing known amounts of selected analytes, five internal standards and
two recovery standards that are analyzed prior to sample analysis.  The
solutions are used to determine the ratio of the instrument response of the
analytes to that of the appropriate internal standard and the internal
standards to that of the recovery standards.

CONTINUING CALIBRATION SOLUTION - a mixture of known amounts of analytes that
is analyzed every 12 hours to demonstrate continued acceptable GC/MS
performance and establish the retention time windows for each homologue.  The
same solution is used for the mid-level concentration calibration solution,
CC3.

DAY - unless otherwise specified, day shall refer to calendar day.

ESTIMATED DETECTION LIMIT (EDL) - the concentration of a analyte required to
produce a signal with peak height of at least 2.5 times the background signal
level.  The EDL is calculated for each 2,3,7,8-substituted isomer for which
the response of the quantitation and confirmation ions is less than 2.5 times
the background level.

ESTIMATED MAXIMUM POSSIBLE CONCENTRATION (EMPC) - the concentration of a
given analyte that would produce a signal with a given peak area.  The EMPC
is calculated for 2,3,7,8-substituted isomers for which the quantitation
and/or the confirmation ion(s) has signal-to-noise in excess of 2.5 but does
not meet identification criteria.

FIELD BLANK - a portion of chemical waste, soil or water that is not
contaminated with PCDDs/PCDFs and is submitted with the samples. The field
blank is used to check for contamination from the time of sample collection
through the time of sample analysis.

HOMOLOGUE - a member or members of a particular homologous series that has
the same molecular weight but not necessarily the same structural
arrangement.  For example, the 28 pentachlorinated dibenzofurans are
homologues.
                                    G-2                               DFLM01.0

-------
HOMOLOGOUS SERIES - a series of organic compounds in which each successive
member has one more atom or group of atoms than the preceding member.  The
straight chain hydrocarbons and the polychlorinated dibenzo-p-dioxins are
examples of a homologous series.

IN-HOUSE - at the Contractor's facility.

INITIAL CALIBRATION - analysis of analytical standards for a series of
different specified concentrations.  The initial calibration used to define
the linearity and dynamic range of the response of the mass spectrometer to
the target compounds.

INTERNAL STANDARDS (Tables 2 and 4) - 13C12-2378-TCDD, 13C12-123678-HxCDD,
13C12-OCDD, 13C12-2378-TCDF atld   C12-1234678-HpCDF (in isooctane) are added
to every sample and are present at the same concentration in every blank,
quality control sample, and concentration calibration solution.  The internal
standards are added to the sample before extraction and are used to measure
the concentrations of the analytes.

ISOMER - chemical compounds that contain the same number of atoms of the same
elements, but differ in structural arrangement and properties.  For example,
1234-TCDD and 2378-TCDD are structural isomers.

LABORATORY - synonymous with the term Contractor.

LOW RESOLUTION MASS SPECTROMETRY - a mass spectrometric technique capable of
achieving unit mass (i.e., 1 amu) resolution between compounds introduced
into the instrument.

MATRIX - the predominant material that comprises the sample to be analyzed.
For the purpose of this contract, a sample matrix may be water, soil or
chemical waste (including stillbottoms, fuel oil, sludge and fly ash). Matrix
is not synonymous with phase (liquid or solid).

METHOD BLANK  (previously termed reagent blank) - an analytical control
consisting of all reagents, internal standards and surrogate standards that
is carried through the entire  analytical procedure.  The method blank is used
to define the level of laboratory background contamination.

NARRATIVE  (SDG Narrative) - the portion of the data package which  includes
laboratory, contract, Case and sample number identification, and descriptive
documentation of any problems  encountered in processing the samples, along
with corrective action taken and problem resolution.  Complete SDG Narrative
specifications are included in Exhibit B.

PERCENT MOISTURE  - an approximation  of  the amount of water  in  a soil/sediment
sample made by drying an aliquot of  the sample at 105°C.  The  percent
moisture  determined  in this manner also includes contributions from  all
compounds  that may volatilize  at 105°C, including water.  Percent  moisture  is
determined from decanted samples and from samples that are  not decanted.

PERFORMANCE EVALUATION  (PE) SAMPLE - a chemical waste, soil or water sample
containing known  amounts of unlabeled  PCDDs/PCDFs.
                                    G-3                              DFLM01.0

-------
POLYCHLORINATED DIBENZO-P-DIOXINS (PCDDs) AND POLYCHLORINATED DIBENZOFURANS
(PCDFs) - compounds (Figure 2) that contain from one to eight chlorine atoms.
The 15 2,3,7,8-substituted PCDDs (total PCDDs is 75) and PCDFs (total PCDFs
is 135) are shown in Table 13.  The number of isomers at different
chlorination levels is shown in Table 12.

PROTOCOL - describes the exact procedures to be followed with respect to
sample receipt and handling, analytical methods, data reporting and
deliverables, and document control.  Synonymous with Statement of Work (SOW).

REAGENT WATER - water in which an interferent is not observed at or above the
minimum quantitation limit of the parameters of interest.

RECOVERY - a determination of the accuracy of the analytical procedure made
by comparing measured values for a fortified (spiked) sample against the
known spike values.  Recovery is determined by the following equation:

                   measured value
      %Recovery -  -,	?	  x 100%
              J     known value

RECOVERY STANDARD (Table 9) - 13Ci2-1234-TCDD and 13Ci2-123789-HxCDD are
added to every blank, quality control sample, and sample extract aliquot just
prior to analysis and are present in all solutions except the internal
standards solutions.  Recovery standards are used to measure the recovery of
the internal standards.  When a dilution is required (see Exhibit D,
Paragraph 13.2.5), recovery standards are used to quantitate the native
PCDDs/PCDFs; the TCDD recovery standard is used to quantitate the tetra- and
penta- isomers and the HxCDD recovery standard is used to quantitate the
hexa- through octa- isomers.

RELATIVE RESPONSE FACTOR (RRF) - the ratio of the response of the mass
spectrometer to a known amount of an analyte relative to that of a known
amount of an internal standard as measured in the initial and continuing
calibrations.  The RRF is used to determine instrument performance and is
used in the  quantitation calculations.

RESOLUTION  (also termed separation) - the separation between peaks on a
chromatogram.  Resolution is calculated by dividing the height of the valley
between the  peaks by the peak height of the smaller peak being resolved,
multipled by 100.

RINSATE  - a  portion of the  solvent that is used to rinse sampling equipment.
The rinsate  is later analyzed to demonstrate that samples were not
contaminated during collection.

SAMPLE - a portion  of material to be analyzed that is contained in single or
multiple containers and identified by a unique sample number.

SAMPLE DELIVERY GROUP  (SDG)  - a unit within a single Case that is used to
identify a  group of samples  for delivery.  A SDG is a group of 20 or  fewer
samples within a Case, received over a period of up to 14 calendar days.
Data from  all samples  in a  SDG are due concurrently.  A  SDG is defined by one
of the following, whichever occurs first:
                                    G-4                              DFLM01.0

-------
      o   Case;  or
      o   Each 20 samples within a  Case;  or
      o   Each 14-day calendar period during which  samples  in  a  Case  are
          received,  beginning with  receipt of  the first  sample in the Case  or
          SDG.

Samples may be assigned to SDGs by matrix (i.e.,  all soils in one SDG, all
waters in another), at the discretion of the laboratory.

SAMPLE NUMBER (EPA Sample Number) - a unique identification number designated
by EPA for each sample.  The EPA sample number appears on the sample Traffic
Report which documents information on that sample.

SELECTED ION MONITORING - a mass spectrometric technique whereby ions with
predetermined mass/charge ratios (m/z) are monitored, as opposed to scanning
MS procedures in which all m/z's between two limits are monitored.

SIGNAL-TO-NOISE  (S/N) RATIO  - the ratio of analyte signal to random
background signal.  To determine the ratio,  display each characteristic ion
using a window 100 scans wide, and draw a base line from the lowest point in
the 100 scan window.  The noise is defined as the height of the .largest
signal (excluding signal due to PCDDs/PCDFs or other chemicals)  within the
100 scan window.  The signal is defined as the height of the PCDD/PCDF peak.
If the data system determines the ratio, the Contractor shall demonstrate
comparability between the above criteria and the automated S/N determination.
Chemical noise is left to the judgement of the analyst.

SOIL - synonymous with soil/sediment and sediment.

STANDARD ANALYSIS - an analytical determination made with known quantities of
target compounds.  The standard analysis is used to determine response
factors.

SURROGATES (Surrogate Standard) - the compounds added to every blank, sample,
matrix spike, matrix spike duplicate, and standard.  Surrogates are used to
evaluate analytical efficiency by measuring recovery.  Surrogates are
brominated, fluorinated, or  isotopically labelled compounds not expected to
be detected in environmental media.

TIME - when recording time on any deliverable item, time shall be expressed
as military time,  (i.e., a 24-hour clock).

TOXICITY EQUIVALENCY FACTOR  (TEF)  -  a method of converting concentrations of
PCDDs/PCDFs to an equivalent concentration of 2378-TCDD to obtain an
estimation of the toxicity of the entire sample.   (Update of  Toxicity
Equivalency Factors  (TEFs) for  Estimating Risks Associated with Exposures to
Mixtures of Chlorinated  Dibenzo-p-Dioxins and Dibenzofurans (CDDs/CDFs),
March 1989, (EPA 625/3-89/016).

TRAFFIC REPORT  (TR)  - an EPA sample  identification form filled out by the
sampler, which accompanies the  sample during shipment to the  laboratory and
documents sample condition and  receipt by the laboratory.
                                    G-5                              DFLM01.0

-------
TWELVE-HOUR TIME PERIOD - the 12-hour time period begins with the injection
of the CCS solution on the DB-5 (or equivalent) column or the injection of
the column performance solution on the SP-2331 (or equivalent) column.  The
12-hour period continues until 12:00 hours have elapsed according to the
system clock.  To be included in a given 12-hour time period, a sample or
standard must be injected within 12:00 hours of the CCS solution or the
column performance solution.

VALIDATED TIME OF SAMPLE RECEIPT (VTSR) - the date on which a sample is
received at the Contractor's facility, as recorded on the shipper's delivery
receipt and sample Traffic Report.
                                   G-6                               DFLM01.0

-------